User Tools

Site Tools


implementation:wms:functionalinformation

Table of Contents

Functional guide

1. Picklist

Please see the Stock allocation algorithm section for information about the rules of creating pick lists.

1.1. Global information

Once a wave is selected on the scanner, all the pick lists in the wave go through a process to allocate the stock to an item detailed level. This means the stock is locked on the location.
Pick list lines that have a location allocated, will get the status ‘ready’.

Stock allocation on detailed level is only done for pick locations.
Stock on a bulk location (Non-pick location) cannot be taken to pick.
Also keep in mind that the stock details from the proposal are copied.

So for example: If on the proposal a certain LUID is locked, the pick list can only take stock for this LUID. This is the same for a batch. The pick list will only allocate for locations where the batch on the proposal is stored.

There are some exceptions to allow the picking on bulk locations: Full pallets can be picked from a bulk location, if this has been configured.

Status:

Not ready ('N'): The pick list has been created, but there is no locking done on detail level.
Partially ready ('A'): Some of the lines still do not have locking on detailed level.
Ready ('R'): All the lines have locking on detailed level.
Partially picked ('I'): Some lines are picked
Picked ('P'): All lines are picked
Partially packed ('T'): Some lines are packed
Packed ('K'): All lines are packed
Partially shipped ('L'): Some lines have been shipped (Pmx sales shipping)
Shipped ('S'): All lines have been shipped (Pmx sales shipping)
Partially delivered ('E'): Some lines have been delivered
Closed ('C'): All lines are closed. Either by closing the pick list or shipping all goods.
Force Close ('F'): This is done when an operator does not count the number of collis correctly

In case a movable location is used to pick on, the lines that are picked will be in status ‘Picked’. The users need to go through the packing flow to pack the items.
When no movable location is used, the picked lines get the status ‘Packed’, because the users will not go through the packing flow.
An exception to this rule is when the option ‘Always status picked?’ is set to true on the Pick list type table (For more explanation see Produmex pick list types (PMX_PLTY))

1.2. Stock order by

Picking, Multi picking, Zone picking

The order to take the stock is based on settings in the pick list controller.

If there is a custom 'Stock order by' option, the sorting will be the value of that setting.

DEFAULT

When the setting has the value *DEFAULT*, the sorting is as below:

Settings that are taken in account:

  • Must the user pick full pallet from bulk location
  • Can the user pick full pallet from bulk location

If the setting ‘Must the user pick full pallet from bulk location’ is checked, the sorting is as follows:

  • BBD
  • BatchNumber
  • BatchNumber2
  • Priority pick location
  • Full pallet
  • Non-pick location
  • Has LUID
  • Location sequence
  • LUID

Otherwise the sorting is done as:

  • BBD
  • BatchNumber
  • BatchNumber2
  • Priority pick location
  • Pick location
  • Has LUID
  • Full pallet
  • Location sequence
  • LUID

After getting this sorting, the system will loop through all the lines it finds. If during this loop, a full pallet is found on a pick location, it is stored in a separate list, and is NOT used on the pick list line. If there is still quantity to allocate after assigning the locations to the pick list line, the stock for full pallets on a pick location is used.

BIGGEST PALLET FIRST

When setting the value as *BIGGEST PALLET FIRST*, the system picks from the pallet where the remaining quantity will be lowest.

First the system sorts the stock as follows:

  • highest quantity
  • oldest LUID

After the sorting, the system will loop through all the lines.

  • If the quantity on the logistic unit is higher than the quantity to pick, the system stores it in a memory list which is sorted by: lowest quantity/ oldest LUID.
  • If the quantity on the logistic unit is lower or equals to the quantity to pick, the system assigns it to the picklist.

When there are still stock to pick after the system looped through every line, it will use stock from the memory list.

Examples
We have the following stock situation for the example:
Product A has 5 pallets in stock, the default quantity per pallet is 10 pcs. But we also have 1 ‘older’ larger pallets that has 12 pcs and also an ‘open’ pallet with only 4 pcs.

Product A SSCC 001 12 pcs
Product A SSCC 002 10 pcs
Product A SSCC 003 10 pcs
Product A SSCC 004 10 pcs
Product A SSCC 005 4 pcs

Scenario 1: Ordered quantity = quantity on given SSCC
Example 1: We have a sales order for 4 pcs → system allocates SSCC 005
Example 2: We have a sales order for 10 pcs → system allocates SSCC 002 (oldest SSCC that matches the quantity)
Example 3: We have a sales order for 12 pcs → system allocates SSCC 001

Scenario 2: Smallest SSCC < Ordered quantity < quantity on given SSCC
Example 1: We have a sales order for 5 pcs → system allocates 4 pcs from SSCC 005 and 1 pcs from SSCC 001 (because this is the oldest).

Scenario 3: Smallest SSCC > Ordered quantity
Example 1: We have a sales order for 3 pcs → system allocates 3 pcs from SSCC 005 (biggest SSCC that is less than the quantity to pick)

Scenario 4: Ordered quantity > Biggest SSCC
Example 1: We have a sales order for 14 pcs → system allocates 12 pcs from SSCC 001 (biggest SSCC that is less than remaining quantity) and allocate 2 pcs from SSCC 005 (smallest remaining quantity)

Scenario 5: Ordered quantity > Biggest SSCC, but lowest quantity does not fulfill the needs
For this scenario the stock is:

Product A SSCC 001 12 pcs
Product A SSCC 002 10 pcs
Product A SSCC 003 10 pcs
Product A SSCC 004 10 pcs
Product A SSCC 005 4 pcs
Product A SSCC 006 1 pcs

Example 1: We have a sales order for 14 pcs → system allocates 12 pcs from SSCC 001 (biggest SSCC that is less than remaining quantity). Next SSCC 006 is used, because the quantity available is more than the remaining quantity.

Now there is still 1 piece remaining. There is no more stock to be used, so now the system will loop through the remaining stock, but smallest quantity first. This means that 1 piece of SSCC 005 will be used.

Ad hoc picking

For ad hoc picking, the stock is sorted by:

  • BBD
  • Batch with smallest free stock
  • Pick locations
  • Location with most LUID’s
  • Non-full pallets
  • Smallest quantities per inventory line
  • Location sequence

'Stock order by' query

The following tables are used in the query:

  • “OITM”
  • “PMX_OSSL”
  • “PMX_OSWA”
  • “PMX_LUID”
  • “PMX_LUID” AS “MasterLUIDTable”
  • “PMX_ITRI”

Subqueries with the used columns:

  • “OldestSerialPerLuid”
    (“LUID”, “SerialNumber”)
  • “InventoryDetail”
    (“InventoryQuantity”, “InventoryQuantityUom2”, “ItemCode”, “QualityStatus”, “PmxWhsCode”, “LocationCode”, “InternalKey”, “LUID”, “MasterLUID”, “ItriKey”)
    This subquery lists all the stock and the details needed for a ‘Detail’ level locking linked to them.
  • “InventoryLUID”
    (“InventoryQuantity”, “InventoryQuantityUom2”, “ItemCode”, “QualityStatus”, “PmxWhsCode”, “LUID”, “MasterLUID”, “ItriKey”)
    This subquery lists all the stock and the details needed for a ‘LUID’ level locking linked to them.
  • “InventoryBatch”
    (“InventoryQuantity”, “InventoryQuantityUom2”, “ItemCode”, “QualityStatus”, “PmxWhsCode”, “ItriKey”)
    This subquery lists all the stock and the details needed for a ‘Batch’ level locking linked to them.
  • “InventoryItem”
    (“InventoryQuantity”, “InventoryQuantityUom2”, „ItemCode“, “QualityStatus”, “PmxWhsCode”)
    This subquery lists all the stock and the details needed for an ‘Item’ level locking linked to them.
  • “LockedItem”
    (“LockedQuantity”, “LockedQuantityUom2”, „ItemCode”, „QualityStatus“, “PmxWhsCode”)
    This subquery lists all the stock locked on ’Item/Quantity’ level with the details needed for the locking.
  • “LockedBatch”
    (“LockedQuantity”, “LockedQuantityUom2”, “ItemCode”, “QualityStatus”, “PmxWhsCode”, “BatchNumber”, “BatchNumber2”, “BBD”, “ItriKey”)
    This subquery lists all the stock locked on ’Batch’ level with the details needed for the locking.
  • “LockedLUID”
    (“LockedQuantity”, “LockedQuantityUom2”, “ItemCode”, “QualityStatus”, “PmxWhsCode”, “LUID”, “BatchNumber”, “BatchNumber2”, “BBD”, “ItriKey”)
    This subquery lists all the stock locked on ’LUID’ level with the details needed for the locking.
  • “LockedDetail”
    (“LockedQuantity”, “LockedQuantityUom2”, “ItemCode”, “QualityStatus”, “PmxWhsCode”, “LocationCode”, “LUID”, “BatchNumber”, “BatchNumber2”, “BBD”, “ItriKey”)
    This subquery lists all the stock locked on ’Detail’ level with the details needed for the locking.

When allocating stock for the picklist, the system will count the available stock based on the following logic:
First the system counts the difference between the inventory quantity and the locked quantity for each level.

{“InventoryItem”.”InventoryQuantity“ - “LockedItem”.”LockedQuantity“}
{“InventoryBatch”.”InventoryQuantity“ - “LockedBatch”.”LockedQuantity“}
{“InventoryLUID”.”InventoryQuantity“ - “LockedLUID”.”LockedQuantity“}
{“InventoryDetail”.”InventoryQuantity“ - “LockedDetail”.”LockedQuantity“}

The lowest calculated value will be taken as the available quantity.

1.3. No location allocated

When there is no location allocated on the pick list, it means that there is no free stock available on the locations allowed for picking.

So there is no free stock on pick locations, and (if configured to allow full pallet bulk picking) there a no free full pallets on bulk locations.

1.4. Pick list screen

1.4.1. Make delivery

On the pick list screen there is a button called ‘Make delivery’.
This button can only be used when:

  • The pick list is in status ‘Ready’
  • The pick list does not have any products with serial numbers
  • The option ‘Do not lock stock on picking’ is not set

When clicking the button, the system will pick, pack, load and deliver the goods on the pick list.
It will use the stock details from the pick list.
It is not possible to override locations, LUID, …

1.4.2. Skip item

This button is available when:

  • The form is in OK mode. This means there are no unsaved changes to the pick list.
  • All selected pick list lines have status ‘Not ready’ or ‘Ready’
  • At least 1 line is selected

When clicking the button, the system will skip the selected lines. This means the lines will be closed, and the items will not be picked.

1.4.3. Choose alternate item

This button is available when:

  • The form is in OK mode. This means there are no unsaved changes to the pick list.
  • The selected pick list line has status ‘Not ready’ or ‘Ready’
  • Exactly 1 line is selected

When clicking the button, the system will show an additional screen where the user can select 1 or more alternate items to pick from.
If over picking is allowed, the system will allow the user to select more than what was needed to pick.
The list of alternate items is compiled the same way as it would on the picking flow.

1.4.4. Adjust quantity for non-inventory items

The quantity for non-inventory items can be changed when the pick list line is in status ‘Ready’.

2. Picklist proposal

Please see the Stock allocation algorithm section for information about the rules of creating pick list proposals.

2.1. Disallowed locations

Stock on some locations is not allowed to use for creation of pick list proposals.
This includes:

  • Can be lined up locations linked to a production line
  • Input location of a production line
  • The production line
  • Special locations linked to a warehouse
  • Moveable locations
  • Locked locations (Cycle count)
  • All locations linked to a WA location

There is a view that is used to get those locations: PMX_DISALLOWED_LOCATIONS_FOR_PICKING

This view used a table with cached data: PMX_CDLP
This table contains the following data:

  • Can be lined up locations linked to a production line
  • Input location of a production line
  • The production line
  • Special locations linked to a warehouse
  • Moveable locations
  • All locations linked to a WA location

The query that is used:

 SELECT "PMX_OSEL"."Code" FROM "PMX_OSEL" WHERE "PMX_OSEL"."TypeCode" IN (N'PRODLINE', N'MOVLOC')
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSPL"."InputLocationCode" FROM "PMX_OSPL" WHERE "PMX_OSPL"."InputLocationCode" IS NOT NULL
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSPL"."PickToLocationCode" FROM "PMX_OSPL" WHERE "PMX_OSPL"."PickToLocationCode" IS NOT NULL
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_CBLU"."CanBeLinedUpLocationCode" FROM "PMX_CBLU"
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSWH"."StorLocLogCar" FROM "PMX_OSWH" WHERE "PMX_OSWH"."StorLocLogCar" IS NOT NULL
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSWH"."StorLocRetItem" FROM "PMX_OSWH" WHERE "PMX_OSWH"."StorLocRetItem" IS NOT NULL
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSWH"."StorLocLostAndFound" FROM "PMX_OSWH" WHERE "PMX_OSWH"."StorLocLostAndFound" IS NOT NULL
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSWA"."InputLocationCode" FROM "PMX_OSWA" WHERE "PMX_OSWA"."InputLocationCode" IS NOT NULL
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSWA"."InputWithBoxLocationCode" FROM "PMX_OSWA" WHERE "PMX_OSWA"."InputWithBoxLocationCode" IS NOT NULL
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSWA"."OutputLocationCode" FROM "PMX_OSWA" WHERE "PMX_OSWA"."OutputLocationCode" IS NOT NULL
 UNION  SELECT "PMX_OSSL"."Code" FROM "PMX_OSSL" WHERE "PMX_OSSL"."BlockStockFromBeingUsedOnProposal" = N'Y'

The cached table is filled when the add-on or fat client is started.

The locked locations are retrieved when running the view, because this information can change a lot.

2.2. Shelf life calculation

In order to calculate the shelf life of an item for a particular customer & shipping address, the systems evaluates the shelf lives that can be found at different places. The first matching shelf life will be taken into account, according to the following priority:

  • shelf life defined in the sales order line (RDR1.U_PMX_SHLF column)
    • Note: Produmex WMS does not support negative shelf life values.
  • shelf life defined on the item master data for the customer code and country code
  • shelf life defined on the item master data for the customer code
  • shelf life defined on the item master data for the country code
  • shelf life defined for the customer code and country code (@PMX_CSSL user table)
  • shelf life defined for the customer code (@PMX_CSSL user table)
  • shelf life defined for the country code (@PMX_CSSL user table)
  • shelf life defined on the item master data (OITM.U_PMX_SLID field)

3. Catch weight

With the catch weight function, it is possible to keep track of the stock in two UoM’s. The catch weight settings of an item can be set on the Produmex Catch Weight tab of the Item Master Data. We recommend the following setup for catch weight items:

  • Set the inventory UoM to the lowest sellable unit, eg. pieces, cases in order to avoid rounding issues.
  • Set the number of decimals of the inventory UoM to zero.
  • Set the weight as the second UoM.

Example: The stock is stored in a case that contains six pieces. If the company only sells cases, the inventory UoM can be ‘piece’ or ‘case’ for this item. But if the company sells pieces as well, the inventory UoM should be pieces. When the UoM would be case, it means that one piece would be 0,16666 cases. This would cause rounding issues during picking/delivering etc.

Please note: Serial managed catch weight items are not supported.

Supported functionality:

  • Purchase Receipt
  • Purchase Return
  • Ad hoc moves
  • Picking
  • Multi picking
  • Ad hoc picking customer collect
  • Packing
  • Shipping
  • Cycle count
  • Production flow
  • Production receipt flow
  • Cross docking
  • Put away
  • Sales return
  • Quality status changes
  • Zone picking
  • Ad hoc picking
  • Mobile packing
  • Consolidated packing
  • Easy Stock selector
  • Direct cycle count
  • Picking for production
  • Production manager
  • Replenishment

4. Fat clients

4.1. Fat client configurations

There are typically 2 types of startup configurations: 1 for a scanner, and 1 for a touchscreen.
Below you can find 1 example of each:

SCANNER:
"C:\Program Files (x86)\Produmex\Produmex Fat Client\Produmex.Sbo.Logex.Execute.FatClient.exe" /f- /a:Produmex.Foundation.SlimScreen.WinGui.PocketSize /s+ /w:240 /h:320 /i:SCANNER1 /cs:SboConnectionString

TOUCH:
"C:\Program Files (x86)\Produmex\Produmex Fat Client\Produmex.Sbo.Logex.Execute.FatClient.exe" /f- /a:Produmex.Foundation.SlimScreen.WinGui.TouchScreen /s+ /w:1024 /h:768 /i:TOUCH1 /cs:SboConnectionString

Explanation for all the parameters:

Parameter Description
/f- f- means no fullscreen, f+ means fullscreen
/a:Produmex.Foundation.SlimScreen.WinGui.PocketSize PocketSize is for scanner fatclient, TouchScreen is for touch fatclient
/s+ s+ means form is sizable, s- means not sizable. Ignored if 'FullScreen' is set.
/w:240 Screen width (pixels) , scanner default = 240, touch default = 1024. Ignored if 'FullScreen' is set.
/h:320 Screen height (pixels) , scanner default = 320, touch default = 768. Ignored if 'FullScreen' is set.
/i:SCANNER1 SCANNER01 is the code of the client defined in the organizational structure
/cs:SboConnectionString Connection string tag name defined in fatclient config file.
/k:+ Show a keyboard.
/kp:50 The percentage of keyboard height.
/sp:50 The percentage of screen width.
/dilng:EN The language to use in the DI API connection (overrides the Produmex.DI_API.Language app setting). Use language codes from the OLNG table (ShortName column). Default: EN.

4.2. Fat client screens

4.2.1. Difference between scanner and touchscreen mode

The application can run either on a scanner or on a touch screen. The scanner mode is used in mobile scanner devices. The touchscreen mode can be used in addition to the scanner, on immobile devices. The minimum screen resolution is 240 x 320 for the scanner mode and 1024 x 768 for the touchscreen mode.

The menu structure is the same on both mode, but the available functions are different. Because the touchscreen is used on immobile devices, flows connected to fixed stations are available in touch screen mode.

4.2.2. Sections of the screen

Title

The title is located on the top of the screen. It can display system commands or the name of the current step. While navigating among the menus, the title shows the menu structure. Next to the menu name, the system also displays the menu page number.



Menu screens have a blue background. Screens in a normal flow have a grey background.

Toolbar

The toolbar is located on the bottom of the screen. When a button is inactive, it is displayed in gray.



(1) Left arrow: Displays the previous screen.
(2) Stop: Exits from the current flow.
(3) Refresh: Updates the document list.
(4) Delete: Removes the selected item.
(5) Right arrow: Displays the next screen.

Additional toolbar buttons on the touchscreen:



(1) Left arrow: Displays the previous screen.
(2) Stop: Exits from the current flow.
(3) Keyboard: Displays the touchscreen keyboard.
(4) Clock: Used in the production flows to start the time registration.
(5) Delete: Removes the selected item.
(6) Settings (This button is not currently in use but is reserved for future use.)
(7) Refresh: Updates the document list.
(8) Right arrow: Displays the next screen.

4.2.3. Quick access menu

When hovering over or pressing on the title, a downward arrow appears. Press the arrow to open the Quick Access menu. To close the menu, press the upward arrow on the bottom.

Quick Access menu

In the standard product the Quick Access menu shows the main menu buttons. The menu can be reached from any flow. When pressing a button on the menu, the user will leave the current flow and all parent flows without any warning and the system will open the selected flow.

The data registered in the current flow will be lost when clicking on a Quick Access button.

Configuration

When a quick access button is pressed, the current flow will be left, and all parent flows also until there is a flow whose constructor contains the following:

 this.StopOnQuickAccessButtonClicked = true 


In the standard product the stop is added in the MainWarehouseMenuFlowScript.

ListOfQuickAccesButtonsToShow dictionary

To be able to show the quick menu, a configuration needs to be done on the main flow to add a list of buttons to show on the quick access menu.

The buttons shown in the quick access menu are the ones defined in the ListOfQuickAccesButtonsToShow dictionary. In the standard product the MainWarehouseMenuFlowScript has this configuration after the user logged on:

ListOfQuickAccesButtonsToShow = new Dictionary<string, string[]>();
ListOfQuickAccesButtonsToShow.Add("MSG_BUTTON_PURCHASE", new string[] { "MSG_BUTTON_PURCHASE" });
ListOfQuickAccesButtonsToShow.Add("MSG_BUTTON_SALES", new string[] { "MSG_BUTTON_SALES" });
ListOfQuickAccesButtonsToShow.Add("MSG_BUTTON_LOGISTICS", new string[] { "MSG_BUTTON_LOGISTICS" });
ListOfQuickAccesButtonsToShow.Add("MSG_BUTTON_PRODUCTION", new string[] { "MSG_BUTTON_PRODUCTION" });


This builds the list of buttons to show, and the ‘path’ to get to that flow.

ListOfQuickAccesButtonsToShow dictionary

Customization

It is possible to customize the Quick Access menu and show buttons one level deeper or disable quick buttons.

It is recommended to customize the Quick Access menu in a custom flow that is created based on the standard Produmex main flows. For more information about how to customize main flows please see: 5.1.13. Workflows

In the example we will add the Picking flow to the Quick access menu and disable the Purchase, Logistic and Production buttons. To add the Picking flow, insert the following after the other quick access buttons in the workflow script:

ListOfQuickAccesButtonsToShow.Add("MSG_BUTTON_PICKING", new string[] { "MSG_BUTTON_SALES",  "MSG_BUTTON_PICKING"  });

The translation key of the new button is ‘MSG_BUTTON_PICKING’.

The path to the flow is “MSG_BUTTON_SALES”, “MSG_BUTTON_PICKING”.

After the Picking button is pressed, the system leaves the current flow and all its parent flows until there is a flow with the option

 ‘StopOnQuickAccessButtonClicked’ = true 

(With default settings it is the main menu flow). Then the main menu flow will start the flow behind the “MSG_BUTTON_SALES” button. This flow contains a list of buttons. The system will start the flow behind the “MSG_BUTTON_PICKING” button that was defined in the path.

Please note: If the path does not exist, an error message will be shown.

Quick Access buttons can be disabled in the same way as other menu buttons. Please see: 5.1.13. Workflows.

If there are existing customized main flows, this functionality will not be enabled by default, because the customized flows do not contain the configuration, nor does it have the functionality to automatically proceed to the correct flow using the patch defined on the Quick Access menu.

4.3. Typical screens

4.3.1. Login screen

Before using the system, log in.
Press the ‘Username’ field and enter the username. The user must be an SAP user. In order to post the documents in SAP Business One, the SAP user need the relevant authorizations and at least an SAP Indirect Access license as of SBO 9.2. PL08.
Press on the ‘Password’ field and enter the password.
Press the right arrow button or 'Enter' to proceed.

It is possible to set a barcode username and password for scanners without numeric keyboards.

4.3.2. Selection screens

Select a button

Buttons can represent functions, tasks or filters. To proceed, select a button and press it. The selected button is highlighted with blue.
If there are more than four buttons in one menu, the right arrow button will be active. Press on the right arrow button to move to the next page of the menu. For going back to the previous page, press the left arrow button.

It is also possible to use the keyboard arrow buttons for navigation. Use the right and left arrow buttons as the touch arrow buttons.
For selecting a button, use the up and down arrows. When pressing the down arrow, the next button will be selected. When pressing the up arrow, the previous button will be selected. Press ‘Enter’ to proceed.

Select from a list

The following information can be selected from a list: a document, a location, a partner, an item, etc.
The system displays all the available options in the list. At this step, new items cannot be added to the system. Select a listed item by pressing it. The selected item is highlighted with blue. When the list is too long to be displayed on one screen, use the green arrows to scroll through the list.
Press the right arrow button or ‘Enter’ to proceed.

List with filtering option
When there is an input field on the top of the list, it is possible to filter the listed items based on their item code and description. Enter text to the field, and the system will only display listed items those name include the text that has been entered.

List with filtering option and a button
When it is possible to continue the flow without selecting an item from a list, the system will display a ‘No list item’ button on the screen. Press the button to continue the flow without selecting an item.

4.3.3. Scanning screens

In the title section the system displays which type of barcode is required for scanning.
When the system requires a barcode, it will show the text “- - >BarCode< - -“ in the field.

Scan a barcode on a logistic unit

Scan the barcode(s) on the item.
All the information from the GS1 barcodes will be saved into the memory and the system will not ask additional questions about the scanned information.

When handling multiple items, it is possible to scan all the SSCC barcodes in one screen. The barcodes that have been already scanned are displayed in a list.
For removing an item, select it from the list and press the ‘Delete’ button on the toolbar.

When it is possible to continue the flow even though there is no GS1 label, a button will appear in the bottom of the screen. Press the button to continue the flow without scanning a barcode.
After having all the barcodes scanned, proceed by pressing the ‘Done’ button.

Scan a barcode on a product

Scan the barcode on the product.
When it is possible to continue the flow even though there is no product barcode, a button will appear in the bottom of the screen. Press the button to continue the flow without scanning.

Scan a location

When the system indicates a default location, it is displayed in the bottom of the screen. Scan the barcode of the indicated location. It is possible to continue with another location by using the buttons, but the system will ask for confirmation.

4.3.4. Screens for entering additional information

It is common in these screens that the system displays an item information section.
When there is a list on the screen, only an information bar will appear. The item information bar shows the item code and description.
The item information section can be opened by pressing the information bar. The item information section might additionally display information based on the current flow and the information stored in the system memory or the information linked to the item.

Add (define) quantity by scanning the serial numbers

Serial numbers
Scan the serial numbers one by one.
On the top of the scanner field, the screen displays the number of the products that have been already scanned and the open number of products in the document. It is not possible to exceed the open number defined in the document.
After having all the serial numbers scanned, proceed by pressing the right arrow button or 'Enter'.

Serial numbers range
Scan the start range (first serial number) and the end range (last serial number). It is not possible to exceed the open number defined in the order. After scanning the two serial numbers, proceed by pressing the right arrow button or 'Enter'.

The screen displays the list of the serial numbers that have been already scanned. When the list is too long to be displayed on one screen, use the green arrows to scroll through the list.
For removing an item, select it from the list and press the ‘Delete’ button on the toolbar.

Enter the quantity with the +/ - buttons

When there is a limit to the quantity, there will be a ‘Maximum’ line in the under the + / - buttons. The entered quantity cannot exceed the quantity defined in the ‘Maximum’ line. The maximum quantity depends on the open quantity in the order (document) or the item quantity in stock.

Enter the quantity with the + / - buttons or with the numeric keypad. The value added by the buttons depend on the ‘Number of decimals for UoM’ setting for the item. Eg.: If the number of decimals is set for 2 for the UoM, then the added value will be 0.01. Under the quantity field, the system displays the unit of measurement.

It is also possible to scan the item barcode(s) to add quantity. Scan the barcode on the item(s) one by one. The system will check whether the barcode and the batch attributes of the item matches with the data of the item in the document. Only the items with matching data will be added as plus one to the quantity.
Press the right arrow button or 'Enter' to proceed.

Please note: In order to go back with the left arrow button, enter a value greater than zero.

Catch weight
Enter the weight with the + / - buttons or with the numeric keypad. When entering the weight, the system also displays the number of pieces under the Maximum quantity.

If the quantity is only defined by the weight, the maximum weight is calculated based on the number of items in the document, the weight of one item and the defined tolerance percentage.
If the quantity is defined by the number of items and the weight, the maximum weight is calculated based on the number of items entered previously, the weight of one item and the defined tolerance percentage.

When entering weight that is lower than the minimum weight which is calculated from the previously entered number of items, the weight of one item and the weight tolerance, the system shows an error message and goes back to the ‘Enter the number of items’ screen.
Press the right arrow button or the 'Enter' button to proceed.

UoM group
When there is a UoM group set to the item, the system will show a quantity input field for each measuring unit assigned to the UoM group in one screen. Enter the quantity with the + /- buttons or with the numeric keypad.
Use the green arrows to scroll through the list.
Press the right arrow button or 'Enter' to proceed.

Enter simple batch data

Enter batch number
Enter the batch number to the input field. Use the numeric keypad.
Press the right arrow button or 'Enter' to proceed.

Enter Best Before Date
Enter the date to the respective field. By default, the system displays a date which is calculated based on the expiry definition settings for the item and the current date.
Press the right arrow button or 'Enter' to proceed.

When there is a best before date linked to the item which expires later than the entered best before date, a warning will be displayed.

4.3.4. System messages

Information message

Information messages are displayed when a task or a flow is completed or the system provides relevant information. Acknowledge the message by pressing the ‘Ok’ button.

Dialog message

Dialog messages provide an opportunity to decide how to proceed the flow. For continuing, select the appropriate button and press it.

Confirmation message

Confirmation screens are displayed when the system needs confirmation about the triggered action or the entered data. For continuing, select the appropriate button and press it.

Error message

Error messages are displayed when an error occurred. Press the ‘Ok’ button to proceed.

5. 3PL invoicing

5.1. Configurations for the 3PL invoicing

Before starting the 3PL invoicing flow, go through the following steps:

5.1.1. Create business partners

Because a 3PL partner can be a customer and a vendor at the same time, in order to handle 3PL partners, create multiple business partner master records for one 3PL partner.

  • ‘Customer’: Create a customer master record for sales deliveries.
  • ‘Vendor’: Create a vendor master record for goods receipt PO’s.
  • ‘Invoicing customer’: Create a customer master record for 3PL invoices.

For the 3PL invoicing process, link the customer(s) to the vendor and the vendor(s) to the invoicing customer.

The vendor has to be entered into the ‘Linked Business Partner’ field under the ‘Produmex’ tab in the ‘Business Partners Master Data’ window of the customer.

Similarly, the invoicing customer has to be entered into the ‘Linked Business Partner’ field of the vendor.

The linking mechanism allows to link multiple customers to the same vendor and multiple vendors to the same invoicing customer.

5.1.2. Set an owner to the item

To define the ownership of an item, use the ‘Preferred vendor’ field under the ‘Purchasing Data’ tab in the ‘Item Master Data’ window. Because in this field only vendor type business partners can be selected, add the Vendor partner.

It is not possible to set more than one owner to an item. That is why you must add a new item for each owner even though it is the same item.

5.1.3. Set the 3PL price(s) to the item

Open the ’Item Master Data’ window. Under the ’Produmex’ tab, go to the 3PL tab. At this tab the item’s 3PL prices can be defined.

The 3PL inbound price will be used when the price calculation is based on the inbound item quantity.
The 3PL outbound price will be used when the price calculation is based on the outbound item quantity.

For further information about the 3PL prices see: 3.1.3. Produmex 3PL Tab

5.1.4. Set the 3PL extension parameters

Set the 3PL extension parameters at the 3PL controller.
For further information about the settings in the 3PL invoicing controller see: 5.1.3.1. 3PL invoicing controller

5.1.5. Create 3PL item(s)

Create 3PL invoicing item(s) for the 3PL service. The 3PL invoicing items cannot be inventory items. The 3PL invoice will be created based on these item(s) and will only contain 3PL invoicing items.

5.1.6. Define a 3PL item to the 3PL price calculation

Open the ‘Organizational Structure’ window from the Produmex module. At the company level, go to the ‘3PL Invoicing‘ tab. Select a 3PL price calculation type, and choose a 3PL item to assign to it from the list. Only non-inventory items will be displayed in the 3PL item list. After assigning a 3PL item, check the ‘Is active?’ box.
For further information about 3PL price calculation types see: 5.1.11. 3PL invoicing

Additional settings for the ‘Storage bin location usage per location type’ price calculation:

5.1.7. Create location types

Add location types at the Produmex Location Types window.
For further information about the location types see: 3.2.3.28. Location types (PMX_LOTY)

5.1.8. Set the location type

Set the location type for the bins where items are stored during the 3PL process. Location types are used when the price calculation is based on the storage bin location usage.

5.2. 3PL invoicing process

When activating the “3PL Invoicing” menu, the “3PL invoicing selection criteria” form opens. There, you can select an invoicing period type and an invoicing period according to the selected period type.
Invoicing period types:

  • Weekly: from the dropdown menu, select the year and the week. By default the previous week will be displayed.
  • Monthly: from the dropdown menu, select the year and the month. By default the previous month will be displayed.
  • Ad-hoc: define the period by entering dates the “date from” and the “date to” fields.

Note: It is possible to select a period which not ended yet, but a warning window will pop up after clicking on the ‘Generate Invoices’ button.

Then you can load 3PL invoicing customers that still need to be invoiced for the selected period. These are the customers who meet both of the following conditions:

  • are the linked partner of another business partner
  • have no A/R invoice or draft document with the “3PL Period” user-defined field set to the first date of the selected period

Select a 3PL invoicing partner from the list. When none of the partners is selected, the system will generate an invoice for each partner on the list. Different generation types can be selected:

  • Add mode: the invoice can be modified manually before being added
  • Draft: the invoice can be saved as a draft
  • Create: the invoice will be created immediately

The 3PL invoices consist of a certain amount of prices, in separate lines, all calculated differently. The created 3PL invoice is linked to the invoicing period by the ’3PL Period’ UDF. This UDF contains the starting date of the invoicing period. Business partners who already have an invoice for the same starting invoicing date will not be listed in the 3PL invoicing selection criteria window.

5.2.1. Inbound document count

The quantity is the number of goods receipt PO’s with the Doc Date included in the invoicing period.
The unit price is the invoicing item’s price, for the price list of the invoicing customer.

5.2.2. Inbound line count

The quantity is the total number of goods receipt PO lines belonging to goods receipt PO’s with the Doc Date included in the invoicing period.
The unit price is the invoicing item’s price, for the price list of the invoicing customer.

5.2.3. Inbound item quantity

For each goods receipt PO line, a price is calculated that is equal to the item’s 3PL inbound price (which can be set up on the Produmex tab of the item master data) multiplied by the received quantity (in inventory UoM). The inbound item quantity price is the total of all these prices for ¬all goods receipt PO’s in the invoicing period.
On the 3PL invoice, the quantity for that item is always 1, and the total price is set as unit price.

5.2.4. Outbound document count

The quantity is the number of sales deliveries with the Doc Date included in the invoicing period.
The unit price is the invoicing item’s price, for the price list of the invoicing customer.

5.2.5. Outbound line count

The quantity is the total number of delivery lines belonging to sales deliveries with the Doc Date included in the invoicing period.
The unit price is the invoicing item’s price, for the price list of the invoicing customer.

5.2.6. Outbound item quantity

For each sales delivery line, a price is calculated that is equal to the item’s 3PL outbound price (which can be set up on the Produmex tab of the item master data) multiplied by the delivered quantity (in inventory UoM). The outbound item quantity price is the total of all these prices for ¬all sales deliveries in the invoicing period.
On the 3PL invoice, the quantity for that item is always 1, and the total price is set as unit price.

5.2.7. Storage bin location usage per location type

For each location type for which active 3PL settings have been defined, the algorithm calculates the bin location usage of each supplier’s stocks on this location type, day per day. The stock level of every day is calculated from the current inventory and the inventory history.
For each day, the algorithm calculates the list of locations that should be invoiced for storage of the supplier’s items:

  • If ‘Daily used number of locations’ is active, then all bin locations that have contained any item of the supplier will be added to the list
  • If ‘Daily final stock’ is active, then all bin locations that contain any item of the supplier will be added to the list

The storage price of each bin location is defined in the price list of the item linked to its location type, and the total storage price for the day is the sum of the bin location prices. If a bin location has no location type, then its price is zero.
If the shortest invoiceable duration is ‘Week’ or ‘Month’, then if a location is used on any day of the week/month, it is considered as used during the whole week/month, and its daily storage price is then multiplied by the corresponding number of days.
On the 3PL invoice, one separate line is added for each location type that takes part into the calculation.

6. Add-on screens

6.1. Inventory report

The inventory report provides information about the current state of the inventory in warehouses managed by Produmex.
The inventory report is available through the menu:

  • Produmex > Inventory report
  • Produmex > Reports > Inventory report.

Add filters for the inventory report on the opening ‘Inventory report – selection criteria’ screen.

The inventory report can be opened directly by the following steps:

  • Click on the ‘PMX Inventory’ button on the Item Master Data screen of an item. Only the stock of that item will be shown.
  • Click on the ‘Inventory’ button on the main screen of an Organizational Structure element. Only the stock of that element will be shown.

Inventory report – selection criteria

Item Number From - To
Enter the item code to the Item Number From field or select from a list after clicking on the icon. The filter will get all stock of the selected item(s).
To filter the report for multiple items, add the first item to the ‘Item Number From’ field and the last item to the ‘To’ field. The filter will get all stock for items starting from the ‘From’ item to the ‘To’ item where the items are sorted alphabetically.

Item Group
Select the item group. The filter will get all stock of items in the selected item group.

Barcode
Add the barcode. The filter will get all stock of items with the added barcode.

Storage location from – To
The ‘From’ – ‘To’ location. Enter a location code or click on the icon and select a location from a list. Only stock stored on the selected location(s) will be listed on the inventory report. To filter on only one location, only enter it in the 'From' field.

Warehouse
Enter the warehouse code or click on the icon and select the warehouse from a list. Only stock stored in the selected warehouse will be listed on the inventory report.

Batch Number From – To
The ‘From’ – ‘To’ batch number. Enter the batch number or click on the icon and select the batch from a list. The filter will get all stock of items with the selected batch number(s). To filter on only one batch, only enter it in the 'From' field.

SSCC
Enter the SSCC number. The filter will only get stock linked to added SSCC number.

LUID
Enter the LUID. The filter will only get stock linked to the added LUID.

Supplier
Enter the Card Code of the supplier click on the icon and select it from a list. Only ‘vendor’ type business partners are listed. The filter will get all stock received from the selected vendor.

Supplier pallet number
The specific pallet number belonging to a business partner. The filter will only get stock linked to the selected supplier pallet.

Quality status
Select a quality status from the list. Every quality status defined for the company will be listed. The filter will only get stock with the selected quality status.

Master SSCC
The Master SSCC number. The filter will only get stock linked to the added SSCC number.

Master LUID
The Master LUID. The filter will only get stock linked to the added LUID.

Batch attributes
Click on the ’…’ button to open up the ’Batch attributes control’ screen.

  • Batch attribute: Select a batch attribute from the dropdown list. Every batch attribute type defined on the Batch attribute types user table will be listed. It is possible to select multiple batch attributes for filtering.
  • Value – Value To: Define the value range by selecting a start and an end value.

Press the ‘Update’ button to add the filter. After the filter has been added, it is marked with *** on the ‘Inventory report – selection criteria’ screen.
Press the ‘Cancel’ button to close the screen without adding a filter.

Group by
Select a grouping option. By default the grouping option is ‘Detail’. Possible values:

  • Item: Products with identical item code and quality status are grouped together.
  • Warehouse: Products with identical item code and quality status, located in the same warehouse are grouped together.
  • Batch number: Products with identical item code, quality status and batch details, located in the same warehouse are grouped together.
  • Storage location: Products with identical item code and quality status, located in the same warehouse and storage location are grouped together.
  • Detail: Products with identical item code, quality status and batch details, located in the same warehouse and storage location and linked to the same LUID are grouped together.
Item code Quality status Warehouse Storage location Batch details LUID
Item
Warehouse
Batch number
Storage location
Detail

Click on ‘Ok’ to open the inventory report or click on ‘Cancel’ to close the screen without opening the report.

Inventory report
List elements are sorted based on the following:

  • If the Group by option is set to Detail, results are sorted based on the ‘Order by - Details’ setting of the Inventory controller.
  • If the Group by option is set to Storage location, results are sorted by: Item code - Warehouse - Storage Location
  • If the Group by option is set to Batch number, results are sorted by: Item code - Batch number - Quality status - Warehouse
  • If the Group by option is set to Warehouse, results are sorted by: Item code - Quality status - Warehouse
  • If the Group by option is set to Item, results are sorted by: Quality status - Item code

Item Code:
The item code.

Barcode:
The barcode.

Description:
The item description.

Batchnumber:
The batch number.

Batchnumber2:
The second batch number.

Best Before Date:
The best before date.

Batch ID:
The batch ID.

LUID:
The LUID.

SSCC:
The SSCC number.

Warehouse:
The code of the warehouse where the stock is located.

Storage location:
The code of the storage location where the stock is located.

Storage location name:
The name of the storage location where the stock is located.

Quality status:
The quality status.

Quantity:
The quantity measured in the inventory UoM.

Uom:
The inventory unit of measure.

Quantity2:
The quantity measured in the second unit of measure.

Uom2:
The second unit of measure.

Supplier pallet number:
The specific pallet number belonging to a business partner.

Gr nr.:
The document number of the Goods Receipt PO document linked to the stock.

Gr date:
The Goods Receipt PO document date.

Supplier code:
The Card Code of the vendor.

Supplier:
The name of the vendor.

PMX warehouse:
The Produmex warehouse code.

Master LUID:
The master LUID.

Master SSCC:
The master SSCC number.

Is full pallet? (Y/N):
Indicates whether something was removed from this logistic unit or not since it was created.

ItmsGrpCod:
The code of the item group where the item belongs.

Click on ‘Ok’ to close the screen.
Click on the icon on the Menu Bar to refresh the screen.

6.1.1. Locking

With the locking function new lockings can be created or existing inventory locks can be viewed. For more information about inventory locks please see: Inventory lock

6.1.1.1. Add

It is possible to add locks manually for a customer, a sales order or a sales invoice. Select an inventory line to lock and click on Locking > Add. A ‘Locked quantity- Add’ screen will open up.
Please note: It is not possible to create locks when the ‘Group by option’ of the inventory report is ‘Item’.

Customer
Enter the Card Code of the customer or select the customer on ‘List of Business Partners’ screen. The name of the customer will be automatically filled in after the system identifies it. After the customer has been selected, only sales orders or sales invoices linked to that customer can be added. Mandatory field.

Sales order
Enter the document number of the sales order or select it on the ‘List of Sales Orders’ screen. After the sales order has been selected, the customer field will be automatically filled in.

Sales invoice
Enter the document number of the sales reserve invoice or select it on the opening ‘List of A/R Invoices’ screen after clicking on the icon. After the A/R reserve invoice has been selected, the customer field will be automatically filled in.

Quantity
Define the quantity to lock.
In the case of batch level locking, the maximum quantity is the open quantity of the batch.
In the case of LUID level locking, the maximum quantity is the open quantity of the batch linked to the LUID.

Lock level
Select a lock level. Possible values: ‘Batch’ or ‘LUID’.

Click on the ‘Update’ button to add the lock. Click on the ‘Close’ button to close the screen without making any adjustments.

6.1.1.2. View

Click on Locking > View to see the inventory locks for the item on the selected line. A ‘Locked quantity’ window will open up. Every ‘Batch’, ‘LUID’ and ‘Detail’ level locked stock of the item on the selected line stored in a PMX warehouse will be listed.

Item Code:
The item code.

Description:
The item description.

Batchnumber:
The batch number.

Best Before Date:
The best before date.

Quality Status:
The quality status.

LUID:
The LUID linked to the stock. The field is empty if the level of the locking is ‘Batch’.

SSCC:
The SSCC linked to the stock. The field is empty if the level of the locking is ‘Batch’.

Storage Location:
The code of the storage location where the stock is located. The field is only filled if the level of the locking is ‘Detail’.

Warehouse:
The warehouse where the stock is located.

Quantity:
The locked quantity.

Uom:
The inventory uom of the item.

Type:
The type of the base document causing the inventory lock.

Doc num:
The number of the base document.

Line:
The line number of the line in the base document the locked stock is linked to.

Is created by the system?: (Y/N)
Indicates whether the lock was created by the system or a user.

Click on the ‘Ok’ button to close the screen.
Click on the ‘Delete’ button to delete the selected lock. Only user created locks can be deleted.
Click on the ‘Adjust’ button to change the locked quantity of the selected line. Only user created locks can be adjusted.
Click on the icon on the Menu Bar to refresh the screen.

6.1.2. Change

Select an inventory line and click on the ‘Change’ button to change certain details of the stock. The following properties can be changed:

  • Packaging quantity
  • Best Before Date
  • Quality status
  • Second batch number
  • Batch attributes
6.1.2.1. Packaging #

The packaging quantity can only be changed for items with defined packaging type.

Adjust the quantity of the packaging type and click on the ‘Update’ button to apply the new quantity.
Click on the ‘Cancel’ button to close the screen without making any adjustments.

6.1.2.2. Best Before Date

The best before date can only be changed for items with best before date.
When multiple lines are selected, the system will only change the first selected line.

Select the new best before date on the calendar then click on the ‘Update’ button.
Click on the ‘Cancel’ button to close the screen without making any adjustments.

6.1.2.3. Quality status

Change status to
Select the new quality status of the stock on the line from the dropdown list. Every quality statuses listed under ‘The quality status can go to these quality statuses’ for the current quality status will be listed.

Quantity
Adjust the quantity of the stock for the quality status change. The maximum quantity is the quantity of the stock in the line.

Quantity uom2
Adjust the quantity measured in the second UoM. The Inventory weight is calculated based on the weight set of one piece and the quantity on the line.

Reason
A reason must be selected if the ‘Ask for reason’ option is flagged for the new quality status. Every reason with flagged ‘Use for quality status change’ option can be selected.

Extra explanation
Extra explanation must be entered if the ‘Requires extra reason text’ option is flagged for the selected reason.

6.1.2.4. Batch number 2

The second batch number can only be changed for items with a second batch number.

Enter the second batch number to the textbox and click on the ‘Update’ button. Please note: This change will affect the entire batch.
Click on the ‘Cancel’ button to close the screen without making any adjustments.

6.1.2.5. Change batch attributes

The batch attributes can only be changed for items with batch attributes.

Adjust the value of the batch attribute and click on the ‘Update’ button. Every batch attribute set for the item will be listed. Click on the ‘Cancel’ button to close the screen without making any adjustments.

Select a report and the printer.

Click on the ‘Preview’ button to see a preview.
Click on the ‘Print’ button to print the report.
Click on the ‘Close’ button to close the screen.

6.1.3.1. Reception label

Only ‘Goods Receipt Label’ type reports can be selected. The ‘Select report and printer’ screen will only open when the selected stock has a linked LUID.

6.1.3.2. Shipping label

Only ‘Shipping Label’ type reports can be selected. The ‘Select report and printer’ screen will only open when the selected stock has a linked LUID.

6.1.3.3. Item label

Only ‘Item Label’ type reports can be selected.

6.1.3.4. Production label

Only ‘Production Label’ type reports can be selected.

6.1.3.5. New Master SSCC label

Only ‘New master logistic unit label’ type reports can be selected.

6.1.4. Move

For more information please see:

6.1.5. Show

6.1.5.1. Batch attributes

Click on the ‘Show batch attributes’ button the see the batch attributes linked to the selected line.

Batch attribute:
The batch attribute type. Every batch attribute set for the item on the selected line will be listed.

Value:
The batch attribute value.

Please note: Batch attributes will be only shown when the group by option is set to ‘Batch number’ or Detail’.

Click on the ‘Hide batch attributes’ button the hide the batch attributes section from the Inventory report screen.

6.1.5.1. Serial numbers

Click on the ‘Show serial numbers’ button to show the serial numbers linked to the selected line.

Serial number:
The serial number.

Info 1:
Information stored in the Information1 field of the PMX_SENU table.

Info 2:
Information stored in the Information2 field of the PMX_SENU table.

Batch ID:
If the item is managed by batches and has PMX serial numbers, the batch ID of the linked batch is show on this field.

LUID:
If the track location option is enabled for the item, the LUID of the linked logistic unit is shown on this field.

Click on the ‘Hide serial numbers’ button to hide the serial numbers section from the Inventory report screen.

It is not possible to show batch attributes and serial numbers at the same time.

6.2. Sales screens

6.2.1. Open sales orders

The open sales order screen is available through the menu: Produmex > Sales > Open sales orders.

On this screen open sales orders for the selected warehouse are listed. Only sales orders that meet the criteria set on the Open Sales Orders Controller are displayed.

Header
Warehouse:
Select a warehouse from the dropdown list. Sales orders linked to the selected warehouse will be displayed on the grid. Only warehouses managed by Produmex can be selected.

Dock:
Define the loading dock of the proposal(s) by selecting a location from the dropdown list. Every loading dock and location that can be the destination of picking from the warehouse can be selected.

Grid
Document type:
The document type. Possible values are: Sales order, A/R reserve invoice.

Sales doc.:
The document number.

Card Code:
The Card Code of the customer.

Card name:
The name of the customer.

Ship To Code:
The ship-to code copied from the sales document.

Address:
The ship-to address.

Due date:
The due date of the sales document. If the due date is the current date, it is marked with bold letters.

Shipping type:
The shipping type.

Preferred vendor(s):
The code of the preferred vendor.

Customer ref. no.:
The customer reference number copied from the sales document.

Zone type(s):
The zone type.

Open quantity:
The quantity of the sales order that still has to be shipped.

Open volume:
The open volume is calculated based on the open quantity.

Open weight:
The open weight is calculated based on the open quantity.

Open price:
The price of the goods that still has to be shipped.

Total quantity:
The total ordered quantity.

#unique items:
The number of items in the sales order.

Total volume:
The total volume is calculated based on the total ordered quantity.

Total weight:
The total weight is calculated based on the total ordered quantity.

Total price:
The total price of the sales order.

Click on the ‘Ok’ or the ‘Cancel’ button to close the screen without making any adjustment. Click on the icon on the Menu Bar to refresh the screen.

Press the ‘Generate pick list proposal’ button to create pick list proposal(s) for the open lines of the selected order(s). The generated pick list proposal will open up. When more than one pick list proposal is created, the ‘Generated pick list proposals’ screen will open up.

When no proposal or only a partial proposal was created for at least one of the selected sales orders, the ‘No proposals made for sales documents’ screen will be shown too.

6.2.1.1. Generated pick list proposals

Pick list proposal:
The document number of the generated pick list proposal.

Address:
The ship- to address.

Card Code:
The card code of the customer.

Card Name:
The card name of the customer.

Click on the ‘Ok’ button or the ‘Cancel’ button to close the screen.
Click on the ‘Close proposal’ button to close the selected pick list proposal(s).
Click on the ‘Generate pick list’ button to generate pick list from the selected pick list proposal(s).

6.2.1.2. No proposals made for sales documents

When the system cannot create a proposal for a sales order or sales invoice, it is listed on the ‘No proposals made for sales documents’ section.

  • DocEntry: Link to the base document.
  • DocNr: The number of the base document.
  • Object Type: The type of the base document.
  • Customer Name: The name of the customer linked to the base document.

When the system cannot allocate full stock for a sales order or sales invoice, it is listed on the ‘Partial proposals made’ section.

  • DocEntry: Link to the base document.
  • DocNr: The number of the base document.
  • LineNr: The line number of the line in the base document.
  • Customer Name: The name of the customer linked to the base document.
  • ItemCode: The code of the item on the line.
  • Linequantity: The quantity ordered from the item on the base document.
  • Locked quantity: The quantity locked for the pick list proposal.

6.2.2. Pick list proposal

The pick list proposal screen can be reached through: Produmex > Sales > pick list proposal.

Selection Criteria
On the ‘Pick list proposal - Selection Criteria’ screen the user can create or open pick list proposals based on the customer, the ship-to address and the warehouse.

Enter the Card Code of the customer. After the customer was selected, select a ship to address from the dropdown menu.

Select a warehouse from the dropdown list. Only warehouses managed by Produmex will be listed.

Click on the ‘Cancel’ button to close the screen.
Click on the ‘Ok’ button.

If there are already existing pick list proposals for that customer and address in the selected warehouse, the system will ask whether to open the existing proposals or create new ones.

  • Click on ‘Yes’ to open the existing proposal(s).
  • Click on ‘No’ to create new proposal(s).
  • Click on ‘Cancel’ to close the screen without making any adjustments.

Pick list proposal

Header

  • Customer: The Card Code and the name of the customer.
  • Address: The ship-to address. (Sales order/ Logistics tab)
  • Dock: Select a dock from the dropdown list. Every ‘Loading’ dock and location that can be the destination of picking will be listed from the warehouse of the sales order. The default dock is the first loading dock in alphabetical order. If there is no unloading dock in the warehouse, the default dock is the first bin location that can be the destination of picking in alphabetical order. If there is no loading dock and no bin location that can be the destination of picking, then no pick list proposal can be created.
  • Pick list type: The pick list type. By default it is the pick list type set for the base document. If there is no pick list type set on the base document, and the base document is a sales order or a sales invoice, the default pick list type is the pick list type set for the business partner. If there is no pick list type set on the base document and the business partner, the default pick list type is 'Standard'.
  • Shipping ID: The shipping ID of the document.
  • Number: The pick list proposal number.
  • Due date: The date the pick list proposal must be picked. By default the due date is the Delivery date or Due Date from the base document. The default due time is 12:00.
  • Pick and pack remarks: Pick and Pack remarks copied from the base document(s). It is possible to adjust the pick and pack remarks on the pick list proposal and the pick list.
  • Remarks: Add internal remarks.

If the base document is an Inventory Transfer Request, an additional ’Whs to move location’ field is displayed on the header. Select a destination dock. Every active ’Unloading’ type dock from the destination warehouse is listed.

Grid

  • Doc. type: The type of the base document.
  • Line: The line number of the line in the base document the pick list proposal line refers to.
  • Item Code: The item code. Different batches are displayed in separate lines.
  • Barcode: The barcode.
  • Item Name: The item name.
  • Ordered qty: The ordered quantity from the base document.
  • Reserved qty: The quantity locked for the pick list proposal.
  • Uom: The unit of measurement from the base document.
  • Open qty: The quantity of the stock that still has to be allocated for the sales order. The open quantity is calculated by: {Ordered quantity – Reserved quantity}.
  • Available: The available quantity of item in the warehouse of the base document.
  • Qty uom 2: The reserved quantity measured in the second UoM.
  • Uom2: The second unit of measurement.
  • Full stock: The inventory status of the item. Possible values:
    • N - Nothing of this item is in stock
    • P - Some of the items are in stock
    • A - All items are in stock
  • Stock compliant shelf life: The inventory status checking the shelf life of the item.
    • N - Nothing of this item checking the shelf life is in stock
    • P - Some of the items checking the shelf life are in stock
    • A - All items checking the shelf life are in stock
  • PG: When this field is empty, no pick list was created based on this proposal. When a pick list has been generated based on the proposal, it is marked with an X.
  • Batch number: The batch number of the batch that is locked for the proposal.
  • Best Before Date: The best before date linked to the stock that is locked for the proposal.
  • Logistic Unit: The reserved LUID.
  • #on LUID: Quantity of the item linked to the LUID.
  • Full LUID? (Y/N): Indicates whether the LUID linked to the locked stock is a full pallet or not.
  • Quality: The quality status of the reserved item.
  • Cancel date: The cancellation date copied from the base document.
  • Ship date: The date of the shipping copied from the base document.
  • Sales employee: The sales employee assigned for the task.

Click on the ‘Update’ button to apply the changes.
Click on the ‘Cancel’ button to close the screen.
Click on the ‘Gen.pick list’ button to generate the pick list based on the proposal.
Click on the ‘Close document’ button to close the document.

6.2.3. Pick list

To open the pick list screen from the menu, follow the path: Produmex > Sales > Pick list.

Header

  • Customer: The Card Code of the customer.
  • Name: The name of the customer.
  • Address: The destination address copied from the sales order.
  • Pick and pack remarks: Remarks for the picking and the packing copied from the pick list proposal. It is possible to adjust the remarks.
  • Number: The number of the pick list.
  • Status: The status of the pick list.
  • Priority: The priority of the pick list. The priority can be adjusted.
  • Storage loc.: The location code of the picking destination. Loading docks and locations that can be the destination of the picking can be selected. The value is copied from the pick list proposal, but it can be adjusted.
  • Due Date: The due date of the picking.
  • Proposal: The number of the base pick list proposal.
  • Wave: The wave number.
  • Customer collect? (Y/N) Indicates whether the customer will collect the goods or not. The default value is based on the shipping type, but it can be adjusted on the pick list.
  • Pick list type: The Produmex pick list type. The value is copied from the pick list proposal, but it can be adjusted.
  • Shipping ID: The Shipping ID copied from the pick list proposal.

If the base document is an Inventory Transfer Request, an additional ’Whs to move location’ field is displayed on the header. The default dock is the dock defined on the pick list proposal, but it is possible to change it. Select a dock from the dropdown list. Every active ’Unloading’ type dock from the destination warehouse is listed.

Grid

  • Item Code: The item code. Different batches and stock located on different locations are displayed in separate lines.
  • Description: The item description.
  • Barcode: The barcode.
  • Picked#: The quantity that is already picked on the line.
  • Open#: The quantity that is still open on the line.
  • Total proposal#: The proposed quantity to pick from the item.
  • Total open#: The open quantity of the item.
  • Total variance: The difference of the total proposed quantity and the picked quantity of the item. The total variance is calculated when closing the pick list proposal.
  • Uom: The inventory unit of measurement of the item.
  • Picked qty uom2: The picked quantity measured in the second unit of measurement.
  • Open # uom2: The open quantity measured in the second unit of measurement.
  • Uom2: The second unit of measurement.
  • Batch Number: The batch number of the stock allocated for the line.
  • Best Before Date: The best before date of the stock allocated for the line.
  • Stor. Loc.: The source storage location.
  • Log. Unit: The reserved LUID.
  • Quality Status: The quality status of the reserved item.
  • Reason: The code of the reason why the pick list line is not fully picked.
  • Status: The status of the line. Possible values: ‘Not Ready’, ‘Ready’, ‘Picked’, ‘Partially packed’, ‘Packed’, ‘Closed’.

Click on the icon on the Menu Bar to refresh the screen.

6.2.3.1. Choose alternate stock

Click on the ‘Choose alternate stock’ button to change the allocated stock on the selected line. The button is active when:

  • The form is in ‘OK’ mode meaning that there are no unsaved changes to the pick list.
  • Exactly one pick list line is selected.
  • The selected pick list line has status ‘Not ready’ or ‘Ready’.

After clicking on the button, the ‘Select alternate stock’ screen will open up. All stock that can be allocated for the pick list will be listed on the screen.

The list of alternate items is compiled the same way as on the picking flow.

Select a stock line to allocate for the pick list. The quantity to allocate can be adjusted on the ‘Quantity’ field. If the ‘Allow over picking’ option is set to true on the General settings tab the system will allow the user to select more than the ‘Quantity to pick’ value, otherwise the maximum quantity that can be added is the ‘Quantity to pick’ value.

Click on the ‘Update’ button to update the pick list with the alternate stock. The status of the selected pick list line will be converted to ‘Ready’ and detail level locks are created for the reserved stock.

6.2.3.2. Adjust quantity for non-inventory items

The quantity for non-inventory items can be changed when the pick list line is in status ‘Ready’.

6.2.3.3. Skip item

Click on the ‘Skip item’ button to skip the stock allocated on the selected line(s).
The button is active when:

  • The form is in OK mode meaning there are no unsaved changes to the pick list.
  • At least one pick list line is selected.
  • All selected pick list lines have status ‘Not ready’ or ‘Ready’.

Select the line(s) then click on the button. The status of the line will be converted to ‘Closed’.

6.2.3.4. Create sales delivery

Click on the ‘Create sales delivery’ button to create the sales delivery. The button is only active when:

  • The status of the pick list is ‘Ready’.
  • The pick list does not have any products with serial numbers.
  • The ‘Do not lock stock on picking’ option is not set on the General settings tab of the Organizational Structure.

When clicking the button, the system will pick, pack, load and deliver the goods on the pick list. It will use the stock details from the pick list.

A sales delivery document or a PMX sales shipping document will be generated, based on the extension set on the Sales delivery note generator.

6.2.3.5. Print

Select a pick list line and click on the ‘Print’ button to print the pick list. The button is only active when the status of the pick list is ‘Not Ready’. The ‘Select report and printer’ screen will open up. Only pick list type reports can be selected as ‘Report’.

After the pick list was printed, the pick list status is converted to ‘Ready’ and detail level locking is created for the reserved stock.

6.2.3.6. Close document

Click on the close document to close the pick list. The pick list proposal will also be closed.

6.2.4. Create reserve invoices from pick list

Open the screen via the following path: Produmex > Sales > Create Reserve Invoices from Pick Lists.

Create reserve invoices from pick list
Every pick list created for sales orders with ‘Picked’ or ‘Packed’ status are listed on the screen.

When the ‘Group PickList for the same Sales Order?’ option is ticked, pick lists created for the same sales order will be grouped into one sales invoice.

Click on the ‘Ok’ button to create a reserve invoice from the document(s) on the selected line(s). The reserve invoice will only be created when every line has a tax code.

The pick list is relinked to the reserve invoice and the sales order is automatically closed.

Click on the icon on the Menu Bar to refresh the screen.

Generated Reserve Invoices
The list of the generated reserve invoices will be displayed on the ‘Generated Reserve Invoices’ screen.

  • Document number: The number of the A/R invoice.
  • Date: The date of the creation.
  • Client: The card code of the customer.
  • Client name: The name of the customer.
  • Ship to address: The ship-to address.
  • Total: The total amount of the invoice.

6.2.5. Inventory locking in advance

Open the screen via the following path: Produmex > Sales > Inventory locking in advance.

On the ‘Inventory locking in advance’ screen it is possible to reserve stock in advance for a customer. The inventory lock will be created during the reception.

Select an item to lock in advance. An item can be selected if the ‘Allow stock to be locked in advance’ option is flagged on the Produmex Sales tab on the Item Master Data of the item.

After an item was defined, the total ordered quantity from the item grouped by the customer and the warehouse will be listed on the screen.

Left section: list of open sales quantities that are not locked yet

  • Customer code: The Card Code of the customer.
  • Customer name: The name of the customer.
  • Open quantity: The open quantity that is not yet locked.
  • Uom: The inventory uom.
  • Warehouse: The warehouse code.

Right section: list of stocks locked in advance

  • Customer code: The Card Code of the customer.
  • Customer name: The name of the customer.
  • #to lock: The locked quantity for the customer from the warehouse.
  • Uom: The inventory uom.
  • Warehouse: The warehouse code.

To create an advance inventory lock, select the line with the customer and warehouse in the left section and move it to the right section clicking on the right arrow button.
To lock less than the total ordered quantity, adjust the quantity in the ‘Open quantity’ field before moving the line or adjust the ‘#to lock’ quantity.
To delete the lock, simply move the lock line from the right section back to the left section.

The sum of the ‘Open quantity’ and the ‘#to lock’ quantity must equal to the total quantity ordered by the customer from the selected warehouse.

Adjust the order of the locking with the up and down arrows. The sequence of the advance lockings defines the order the stock is reserved during the reception.

Click on the ‘Ok’ button to create the advanced locking. Inventory locks will be created during the delivery of the item.

6.2.6. Stock allocation

The stock allocation screen is used to allocate stock of 1 item to several sales order lines or customers.

There are 2 required filter fields that need to be entered:

  • Item
  • Warehouse

The other filter fields are optional:

  • Customer From/To
  • Customer group

The grouping option has 2 options:

  • Sales document
  • Customer

Based on what grouping option has been chosen, the allocation that will be created will be against the sales order or the customer.

Pressing the Apply filter button, the grid will be filled with the data.

On the top right there are some summary fields available:

  • Inventory quantity: The total inventory quantity
  • Free quantity: The current free quantity. This summary takes in account the free quantity in the database, and the unsaved changes in the grid.
  • Total allocated quantity: The total quantity that is allocated in the grid. Quantities that are for instance allocated to a pick list, production order, … are not taken in account for this.

Update
When pressing this button the changes made on the screen are updated to the database.
The are checks that are performed to validate what has been entered. If there is some data that do not pass this validation, the cell 'Error message' will have the explanation about the problem.

Cancel
When pressing this button the changes made on the screen are cancelled and the screen closes.

Clear allocation
This enters a zero in the 'To allocate' column.

Generate pick list proposal
Generates proposals for all selected lines.
This option is only available for grouping option 'Sales document'

Suggest allocation
Suggest an allocation. When no lines are selected, the suggestion will be for all lines in the grid. In case some lines are selected, the suggestion will be for those selected lines. The suggestion works as follows:

  • The free quantity is divided over the selected lines equally.
  • If the quantity to allocate would be more than what is still 'Open # not allocated', the 'To allocate' quantity will be the remaining ''Open # not allocated'
    • The quantity that is not used to allocate for such a line is NOT transferred to other lines.

Purchase screens

1. Purchase Order

1.1. Pre-Print Purchase Order SSCCs

This feature allows you to:

  • Pre-print the GS1 (SSCC) labels for goods to be received (= goods on a purchase order)
  • Use these printed labels to scan & capture the item GTIN, BBD, Quantity, Batch Number.

Setup of item master data : Items need to be batch / BBD activated, and have a valid GTIN-14 barcode. (if you are using EAN-13 codes, just add a 0 at the beginning)

See button on purchase order → Asks for ‘to be received quantity’ and number of LUID’s (= SSCC’s = # of labels) :

  1. Print SSCC’s button
  2. Fill required data : delivered qty, number of LUID’s, copies of label, batch number & BBD
  3. Select layout & printer
  4. Hit print button

In this example, we have printed to a PDF printer, it has printed 6 labels (2 for line 1, 4 for line 2):

This is what the result looks like (1 example for each line):

These labels can now be used and scanned in the following screen during the reception flow :

2. Goods Receipt PO

From product version 2020.06, the POI field is supported on the Goods Receipt PO screen if the SAP country database is set to Argentina. The field is mandatory to be filled in to create a Goods Receipt PO document.

When creating Goods Receipt PO documents, Produmex WMS adds the POI field to the document with a default value of 001. The default value can be customized.

Produmex WMS creates Goods Receipt PO documents in the following cases:

  • Reception
  • Bulk Reception
  • ASN Reception
  • Open ASN Lines form (Receive Goods button)
  • Interfacing Tool (Importing Goods Receipt PO)

POI field

3. Open ASN Lines

On the Open ASN lines screen, it is possible to view, adjust and process the open ASN lines and to print logistic labels for incoming shipments in the office environment.

Open the screen via the following path: Produmex > Purchasing > ASN.

Filter the list
The ASN screen displays data from the PMX_ASND table, but only open lines from purchase orders and purchase invoices are listed. It is possible to filter the list based on the Group ID. Add a group ID to the respective field and press the ‘Filter’ button.

Adjust quantity
To modify the received quantity, enter the new quantity to the Quantity field on the line then press the ‘Update’ button.

Print label
To print the logistic label, press the ‘Print’ button. On the opening screen select the report type and the printer. Only ‘Goods receipt’ type reports set for the company can be selected.

Receive Goods
To receive the goods press the ‘Receive Goods’ button. The system creates the ‘Goods Receipt PO’ document with the adjusted quantities and registers the stock.
Please note: ASN lines registered through the fat client cannot be received on this form.

Delete rows
To delete ASN line(s), select the line(s) then press the ‘Delete Rows’ button. Confirm that you would like to delete the selected rows on the system message.

Cancel
Press the ‘Cancel’ button to close the screen.

Refresh
Click on the icon on the Menu Bar to refresh the screen.

The following information is displayed on the screen:

  • Internal Key: The key of line.
  • Base Type: The type of the base document. Only entries from Purchase Orders (18), Purchase Invoices (22) and Containers (PMX_COHE) are listed.
  • Base Entry: The internal identifier number of the base document.
  • Base Line: The number of the document line.
  • Group By: The group ID. It is possible to filter the list of the open ASN lines based on this value.
  • Item Code: The item code from the document line.
  • Quantity: The ordered or invoiced quantity from the document. The value can be modified.
  • Uom: The unit of measurement for the item.
  • Quantity Uom 2: The quantity in Uom 2.
  • Uom2: The second unit of measurement for the item.
  • Serial Number: The serial numbers linked to the products.
  • ITRI: Item Transactional Information Key. This is a key used to identify a batch.
  • SSCC: The SSCC of the logistic unit where the item is stored.
  • LUID: ID number of the logistic unit where the item is stored.
  • Log. Carrier Code: The code of the logistic carrier where the item is stored.
  • Stor.Loc.Code: The code of the location where the item will be stored after the receipt.
  • Card Code: The Card code of the vendor.
  • Card Name: The name of the vendor.
  • UF1: Customizable fields.
  • UF2: Customizable fields.
  • UF3: Customizable fields.
  • Master LUID: The ID number of the master logistic unit.
  • Master SSCC: The SSCC number of the master logistic unit.

6.4. Inventory screens

6.4.1. Move

Open the ‘Move’ screen via the following path: Produmex > Inventory > Move.

Number: The number of the move document.
Date: The move date.

Item Code: The item code.
Barcode: The barcode.
Description: The item description.
Qty: The quantity of the items moved.
Open qty.: The quantity that is still open on the line.
Batch ID: The batch ID.
Src. Stor. Loc.: The code of the source storage location.
Src. Log. Unit: The LUID of the source logistic unit.
Src. Quality Status: The quality status of the item before the move.
Dest.Stor.Loc.: The code of the destination storage location.
Dest.Log.Unit: The LUID of the destination logistic unit.
Dest.Quality Status: The quality status of the stock after the move.
Master Log Unit: The LUID of the master logistic unit.

Click on the ‘Ok’ button or on the ‘Cancel’ button to close the screen.

6.4.2. Pick list proposal manager

The pick list proposal manager is available thought the menu:
Produmex → Inventory → Picklist proposal manager

It allows the user to create pick list proposals based on document lines. The list of document lines can be filtered through the selection criteria screen.

6.4.2.1. Selection criteria

This is used to filter the document lines. Only the fields 'Document type' and 'Warehouse' are mandatory. The other selection criteria are optional.

Document type
The document type.
This field is mandatory.
Possible values:

Warehouse
The warehouse.
This field is mandatory.

Customer
The from - to customer.

Item
The from - to item.

Item Group
The item group.

Due date
The due date.
The filter will get all documents for this due date.

6.4.2.2. Document lines

On this screen you can select the lines you want to put on the proposal. By clicking the Generate proposal button, the proposals will be created for the selected document lines (except for production orders, see section Pick List for Production).

Dock
Select a dock for the proposal. Every ‘Loading’ dock from the warehouse is listed in alphabetical order.
When no dock is selected, the system will use the first loading dock it finds.

Grid
In the grid user can select all the lines he wants to put on a pick list proposal. The displayed data and the sorting of the lines depend on the settings of the Picklist proposal manager screen controller.

Generate proposal
When pressing this button, the pick list proposal(s) will be created for the selected line(s).
In case no lines was selected, the ‘No rows selected’ message is shown.

If the Pick List Proposal Generator extension is PickListProposalGenerator - Generates picklist proposals, then only lines belonging to the same order are grouped onto a single pick list proposal.

If the Pick List Proposal Generator extension is PickListProposalGenerator - Generates picklist proposals grouped by customer-address, then the system groups order lines that belong to the same customer and address onto a single proposal.
The system allocates stock in the same order as the document lines are displayed on the Pick List Proposal Generator grid.

After the pick list proposals are created, the list of created proposals is shown on the Generated pick list proposals screen. If only one proposal is created, then the generated pick list proposal opens. It is possible that no or only a partial proposal can be made for certain sales order lines. Those lines are displayed on the No proposals made for sales documents screen.

Click on the icon on the Menu Bar to refresh the screen.

6.5. Reports

6.5.1. Open documents report

The screen can be reached via: Produmex > Reports > Open Document Report. On the Open documents report screen open PMX documents can be seen grouped by the document type.

Adjust the settings of the Open documents report on the Open documents screen controller. On the controller the sorting order can be selected for each document type. The view and grid localization for the document types can be also customized on the controller.

Select a ‘Document type’ from the dropdown menu. The following document types can be selected:

  • Route
  • Pick list
  • Pick list proposal
  • Move order
  • PMX Sales shipping
  • Container
  • Weigh order

Item:
It is possible to filter the list based on the item. Enter the item code or select an item from the list.

Click on the ‘Ok’ button to close the screen.
Click on the icon on the Menu Bar to refresh the screen.
Click on the ‘Close document’ button to close the document(s) on the selected line(s).

6.5.1.1. Route

  • Document number: The route number.
  • Description: The route description.
  • Route date: The due date of the route.
  • Route template: The route template number. The field is only filled if the route was created from a template.
  • Loading dock: The code of the loading dock assigned to the route.
6.5.1.2. Pick list

  • Document number: The pick list number.
  • Wave: The wave number.
  • Printed: Possible values: Yes/No
  • Shipping Type (Document): The shipping type of the base document.
  • Pick list type: The pick list type.
  • Customer: The card code of the customer.
  • Name: The name of the customer.
  • Ship to address: The ship-to address.
  • Due date: The due date of the base document.
  • Priority: The priority of the pick list.
  • Status: The status of the pick list.
  • Storage location: The destination of the picking.
  • Route key: The route number the pick list belongs to. When the pick list is not assigned to a route, this field is empty.
  • Shipping ID: The shipping ID of the pick list.
  • Locked by: The user who started the picking.
  • Customer ref.no.: Customer reference number.
  • Preferred vendor: The card code of the preferred vendor.
  • Preferred vendor name: The name of the preferred vendor.
  • Zone type(s): The zone type.
  • Total quantity: The total quantity of the pick list.
  • #unique items: The number of the items on the pick list.
  • Total volume (m3): The total volume of the pick list displayed in m3.
  • Total weight (kg): The total weight of the pick list displayed in kg.
  • Total price: The total amount of the pick list proposal.
Create a new wave

Click the Make new wave button to create a new wave from the selected picklists.

Note: Make sure that the wave contains picklists related to the same warehouse. Waves with picklists related to different warehouses are not supported.

Print

Click on the button to print the selected pick lists.

After printing the pick list, the status is converted to Ready.

Unlock wave

Click the button to remove the user locking from the wave linked to the selected line.

Bulk change

To change certain values for multiple pick list, select the pick lists and click on the ‘Bulk change’ button.

Adjust the values on the opening ‘Bulk change pick lists’ screen. The following values can be changed:

  1. Priority
    Select a priority level from the dropdown list.
  2. Pick list type
    Select a pick list type from the dropdown list. The pick list type can only be changed if the type of the base document is the same for every selected pick list. Every Produmex pick list type that is not used for production can be selected.
  3. Storage location
    Select a storage location from the dropdown list. Active unloading docks and active locations that can be the destination for picking are listed. The storage location can only be changed if every selected pick list needs to be picked from the same warehouse.

On the grid every selected pick list is listed.

Press the ‘Change’ button to adjust the values for every selected pick list. Only fields where a value has been selected will be adjusted.
Press the ‘Cancel’ button to close the screen without changing any value.

6.5.1.3. Pick list proposal

On this screen, every open pick list proposal is listed. Pick list proposals with open pick list are displayed based on the setting for the ‘Show proposals with pick lists on open doc. report?’ option on the Pick List Proposal generator.

  • Document number: The pick list proposal number.
  • Pick list type: The pick list type.
  • Due date: The due date of the base document.
  • Customer: The card code of the customer.
  • Name: The name of the customer.
  • Ship to address: The ship-to address.
  • Storage location: The destination of the picking.
  • Pick list: Indicates whether a pick list was created based on the proposal or not.
  • Route key: The number of the route the pick list belongs to.
  • Shipping ID: The shipping ID of the pick list proposal.
  • Customer ref.no.: The customer reference number copied from the sales order.
  • Preferred vendor: The card code of the preferred vendor.
  • Preferred vendor name: The name of the preferred vendor.
  • Zone type(s): The zone type.
  • Total quantity: The total quantity of the pick list proposal.
  • #unique items: The number of the items on the pick list proposal.
  • Total volume (m3): The total volume of the pick list proposal displayed in m3.
  • Total weight (kg): The total weight of the pick list proposal displayed in kg.
  • Total price: The total price of the pick list proposal.

Click on the ‘Generate pick list wave’ button to create pick list(s) that are grouped in a wave from the selected line(s).

Click on the ‘Generate pick list’ button to create pick list(s) from the selected line(s). Each generated pick list has its separate wave.

6.5.1.4. Move order

  • Document number: The number of the move order.
  • Due date: The due date of the move.
  • Type: The move type. Possible values: Move, Put away, Replenishment, Warehouse transfer.
  • Priority: The code of the priority.
  • Status: The status of the move order. Possible values: Nothing Moved and Partially Moved.
  • In one time?: Indicates whether the move order can/must be moved in one time or not. Its value can be set in the process of Move SSCC. Possible values displayed in the column:
    • No - Cannot be moved in one time
    • Y - Can be moved in one time
    • M - Must be moved in one time
6.5.1.5. PMX Sales shipping

When the ‘Use Pmx sales shipping?’ option is enabled on the Sales delivery note generator, the delivery will be booked in a PMX Sales Shipping document.

The SAP sales delivery can be created based on the PMX Sales Shipping Document through the Sales Delivery Tool, or manually on the Open Documents report.

  • Document number: The number of the PMX Sales Shipping document.
  • Due date: The date when the document was created.
  • Pick list type: The type of the base pick list.
  • Customer: The card code of the customer.
  • Name: The name of the customer.
  • Shipping type: The shipping type of the base sales order.
  • Customer reference number: The customer reference number copied from the sales order.
  • Ship to address: The ship-to address.
  • Tracking number: The tracking number. Based on the shipping type, the user might have to add the tracking number during the picking.
  • License plate: The license plate.
  • Trailer number: The trailer number.
  • Driver name: The name of the driver. Based on the general settings for the company and the shipping type, the user might have to add the license plate, the trailer number and the name of the driver during the shipping.

Click on the ‘Create Sales Delivery’ button to create a sales delivery document based on the selected PMX Sales Shipping document.
Click on the ‘Print PMX Sales Shipping’ button to print the selected document. On the opening ’Select report and printer’ screen select the report and the printer. Only ‘PMX Sales shipping report (PSSH-RPT)’ type reports can be selected. Please note: It is not possible to print multiple PMX Sales Shipping document simultaneously.

PMX Sales Shipping

Header

  • Customer: The Card Code of the customer.
  • Name: The name pf the customer.
  • Number: The number of the PMX Sales Shipping document.
  • Date: The date and time of the creation.

Grid

  • Item Code: The item code.
  • Description: The item description.
  • Src.Stor.Loc.: The code of the loading dock.
  • Best Before Date: The best before date of the stock to ship.
  • Batchnumber: The batch number linked to the stock to ship.
  • Batchnumber2: The second batch number linked to the stock to ship.
  • Quality Status: The quality status of the stock.
  • LUID: The LUID.
  • Quantity: The quantity to ship.
  • Uom: The unit of measurement.

Click on the ‘Ok’ button to close the screen.

6.5.1.6. Container

  • Document number: The number of the container.
  • Type: The container type. The possible values are: ‘Sales’, ‘Purchase’, ‘Route’.
  • Code: The code of the container.
  • Description: The description of the container.
  • ETA: The estimated time of arrival.
  • Status: The status of the container. The possible values are: ‘Open’, ‘In transit’, ‘Delivered’, ‘Closed’.
6.5.1.7. Weigh order

  • Doc. Number: The document number of the weigh order.
  • Due Date: The due date of the weigh order.
  • Priority: The priority of the weigh order.
  • Weighing room: The weighing room assigned to the order.
  • Prod.order: Link to the base production order.
  • Prod.doc.number: The document number of the base production order.
  • Item code: The item code of the main product.
  • Item name: The item name of the main product.
  • Weighing strategy: The weighing strategy of the main product that was defined on the Produmex Production tab of the Item Master Data.
  • Status: The status of the weigh order.

Click on the ‘Print’ button to print the weigh order report for the selected weigh orders.

6.5.2. Audit trail

The “Audit trail” function in the Produmex Office module allows to document the change history of relevant Organizational Structure Elements or relevant aspects or characteristics of items, business partners, etc.

6.5.3.1. Prerequisites

Set the changes to track on the History config tab of the Organizational Structure before starting to use the Audit trail function. Changes made in the following tables can be tracked:

TABLE
AudiPMX_AUDI
Can be lined upPMX_CBLU
Document lockingPMX_DOLL
History tablePMX_HCOH
History columnPMX_HCOL
Item shelf life for partnerPMX_ICSL
Inventory lockingPMX_INLD
Item zone typePMX_ITZT
Current lined up locationPMX_LIUP
Logistic unitPMX_LUID
Link zone – zone typePMX_LZZT
BinPMX_OSBI
CompanyPMX_OSCO
DockPMX_OSDO
Ose elementPMX_OSEL
Moveable locationPMX_OSML
Packing linePMX_OSPA
Production linePMX_OSPL
PrinterPMX_OSPR
Ose storage locationPMX_OSSL
Silo/TankPMX_OSST
Thin clientPMX_OSTC
Pmx WarehousePMX_OSWH
ZonePMX_OSZO
Page sizePMX_PGSZ
Print report eventsPMX_PRRP
Production step listPMX_PSLH
Production step list linePMX_PSLL
Quality status transitionPMX_QSTT
Quality statusPMX_QYST
ReasonsPMX_REAS
ReportPMX_RPRT
Route templatePMX_RTTH
Route template linePMX_RTTL
Fixed item on locationPMX_SLIT
SSCCPMX_SSCC
Zone typePMX_ZOTY

EXAMPLE: Route template lines
In the example we will track the changes in route templates.
First we set the PMX_RTTH table to track on the History config window.

OSE-History config

For the sake of the example, we updated a route template:
We removed the Customer 3 with the ‘Turkey _Istanbul’ shipping code and added Customer 5 instead. We also changed the route sequence.

Route templates

To see the change history of the tables you set to track on the History config tab of the Organizational Structure, open the Audit trail search window via the following path: Produmex > Reports > Audit trail.

On this windows filters for the Audit trail can be added.

  • Table: The filer will get changes only from the selected table. Please note: every table that can be tracked will be listed, not only the ones that are set to track.
  • Column: When a table is selected, it is possible to select a column from a dropdown list. Every column from the table is listed. The filter will get changes only from the selected column(s) of the table.
  • User: The filter will only get changes made by the added user.
  • From: The filter will get changes made from the selected date.
  • Till: The filter will only get changes made until the selected date.

Press the ‘Update’ button to see the details of the Audit trail. The Audit trail details window will open up. In case the user makes no selection, an overview of the complete audit trail will be shown.

EXAMPLE: Route template lines
On the Audit trail search window we select the ‘PMX_RTTL - Route Template Line’ table.

Audit trail search

6.5.3.3. Audit trail details

On the Audit trail details window an overview of the changes is shown. Displayed information:

  • Table: The table where the record was created.
  • Column: The column of the table where the record was created.
  • PK: The primary key value of the record of logged table column.
  • Type: The type of the change. Possible values are: A -Add, U -Update, D -Delete.
  • Old value: The value before the update.
  • New value: The value after the update.
  • User: The user who updated the record.
  • DB User: The database user name.
  • Host: The database server.
  • Date: Date of creation of the record.
  • Time: Time of creation of the record

The list can be filtered further with the standard SBO Filter table function.

EXAMPLE: Route template lines
The overview shows that we deleted ‘Customer 3’ customer from the template, added ‘Customer 5’ to the template then changed the route sequence.

Audit trail detail

6.5.3. Traceability

The ’Traceability report’ function of the Produmex WMS Office module makes it possible to call up traceability information regarding specific items, batches, production lines and periods.

Open the search screen for the Traceability report via: Produmex>Reports>Traceability report. On this form the parameters of the report can be set.

Traceability report search

Possible parameters:

  • Item code: Gets the selected item only.
  • Barcode: Gets items with the selected barcode only.
  • Batch number: Gets the selected batch only.
  • Second batch number: Gets the batch linked to the selected second batch only.
  • Serial number: Gets the item(s) that has the added serial number.
  • Production line: Gets products produced on the selected line.
  • From/Till: Gets documents only from the defined period.
  • Report type: The type of the traceability report. Possible values:
    • Backward: the tree structure will show the raw materials, sub-products and packaging materials that were used to create the end product.
    • Forward: The tree structure will only follow the produced/assembled/packaged product forward through the supply chain.

The difference between the two report types only applies to items that are produced, assembled and packaged by the company.

Click on the ‘Ok’ button to see the traceability report.

6.5.2.2. Overview of traceability information

On the right side of the window the system shows the search result in a tree structure.

The report type is displayed on the root of the tree.

Report type

(1) At this level items that meet the search criteria are listed.
(2) Batches registered for the parent item are listed at this level.
(3) If the report type is ‘Backward’, components and materials that were used during the production/assembly/package of the batch/BBD on the parent level are listed.
(4) If the report type if ‘Backward’, the exact batch(es)/BBD that were used during the production/assembly/package of the batch on the parent level are listed.
(5) If the report type is ‘Forward’, products produced/assembled/packaged using the batch/BBD on the parent level are listed.
(6) If the report type if ‘Forward’, the exact batch(es)/BBD that were produced/assembled/packaged using the batch on the parent level are listed.

The following traceability aspects can be monitored through the ’Traceability Reporting’ function:

  1. Goods receipt
  2. Deliveries
  3. Movements
  4. Quality status change
  5. Issues
  6. Receipts
  7. Stock
  8. Batch attribute

Click the Copy to clipboard button to copy the data from the selected line(s).
Click the Close button to close the Traceability report.

Note: Movements performed by the Return Components option of the SAP B1 Receipt from Production screen are not monitored by the Traceability Reporting function. Make sure that components released for production are returned to inventory by using the Mobile Client (for example with Ad Hoc Moves).

6.5.2.2.1. Goods receipt

On the ‘Goods receipt’ tab the Goods Receipt PO and the Goods Retrun documents linked to the selected batch are listed. The system also provides a link to the listed documents.

Displayed information:

  • Type: The document type
  • Doc Num: The document number.
  • Creation Date & Time
  • User: The user who created the record.
  • Business Partner: The code and description of the business partner.
  • Quantity: The inventory difference. If the document is a Goods receipt PO, the quantity is positive, if the document is a Goods return, the quantity is negative.
  • Quantity per Uom: The conversion factor between the UoM and the base UoM.
  • Uom
  • Quantity per Uom2: The conversion factor between the second UoM and the base UoM.
  • Uom2
  • Batchnumber 1 & Batchnumber 2
  • Best Before Date
  • LUID
  • SSCC
  • Storage Location
  • Quality Status
  • Reason & Reason free text: The reason and the extra reason linked to the document.
  • Master LUID
  • Master SSCC

If the item is managed by serial numbers, the serial numbers linked to the selected document will be displayed in a separate section on the screen.

Goods receipt

6.5.2.2.2. Deliveries

On the ‘Deliveries’ tab the Delivery and the Return documents linked to the selected batch are listed. The system also provides a link to the listed documents.

Displayed information:

  • Type: The document type
  • Doc Num: The document number.
  • Creation Date & Time: The date of the creation.
  • User: The user who created the record.
  • Business Partner: The code and description of the business partner.
  • Quantity: The inventory difference. If the document is a Return, the quantity is positive, if the document is a Delivery, the quantity is negative.
  • Quantity per Uom: The conversion factor between the UoM and the base UoM.
  • Uom
  • Quantity per Uom2: The conversion factor between the second UoM and the base UoM.
  • Uom2
  • Batchnumber 1 & Batchnumber 2
  • Best Before Date
  • LUID
  • SSCC
  • Storage Location
  • Quality Status
  • Master LUID
  • Master SSCC

If the item is managed by serial numbers, the serial numbers linked to the selected document will be displayed in a separate section on the screen.

Deliveries

6.5.2.2.3. Movements

On the ‘Movements’ tab Move and Inventory transfer documents linked to the selected item or batch are listed. The system also provides links to the listed documents.

Displayed information:

  • Doc Entry: The document number.
  • Creation Date & Time
  • User: The user who created the record.
  • From location & To location*
  • Quantity: The inventory difference.
  • Quantity per Uom: The conversion factor between the UoM and the base UoM.
  • Uom
  • Quantity per Uom2: The conversion factor between the second UoM and the base UoM.
  • Uom2
  • Batchnumber 1 & Batchnumber 2
  • Best Before Date
  • From LUID
  • From SSCC
  • To LUID
  • To SSCC
  • Master LUID
  • Master SSCC
  • Information 1: Additional information on the move.

* In the case of warehouse moves, the Inventory Transfer document is listed in two separate lines. On the first line only the source location is filled and the quantity is negative. On the second line only the destination location is filled and the quantity is positive.

If the item is managed by serial numbers, the serial numbers linked to the selected document will be displayed in a separate section on the screen.

Movements

6.5.2.2.4. Quality status change

The ‘Quality Status Changes’ tab shows all quality status changes that have taken place on the selected batch. The system also provides a link to the document that booked the quality status change.

Displayed information:

  • Doc Entry: The document number.
  • Creation Date & Time
  • User: The user who created the document.
  • From quality status & To quality status
  • Quantity: The inventory difference.
  • Quantity per Uom: The conversion factor between the UoM and the base UoM.
  • Uom
  • Quantity per Uom2: The conversion factor between the second UoM and the base UoM.
  • Uom2
  • Batchnumber 1 & Batchnumber 2
  • Best Before Date
  • LUID
  • SSCC
  • Reason & Reason free text: The reason and the extra reason linked to the document.

Quality status change

6.5.2.2.5. Issues

On the ‘Issues’ tab Issue for Production and Goods issue documents linked to the selected batch are listed. The system also provides a link to the listed documents.

Displayed information:

  • Type: The document type.
  • Doc Num: The document number.
  • Creation Date & Time
  • User: The user who created the document.
  • Quantity: The inventory difference.
  • Quantity per Uom: The conversion factor between the UoM and the base UoM.
  • Uom
  • Quantity per Uom2: The conversion factor between the second UoM and the base UoM.
  • Uom2
  • Batchnumber 1 & Batchnumber 2
  • Best Before Date
  • LUID
  • SSCC
  • Storage Location (The source location)
  • Quality Status
  • Reason: The reason linked to the record.
  • Reason & Reason free text: The reason and the extra reason linked to the document.

If the item is managed by serial numbers, the serial numbers linked to the selected document will be displayed in a separate section on the screen.

Issues

6.5.2.2.6. Receipts

On the ‘Receipts’ tab Receipts from production and Goods receipt documents linked to the selected batch are listed. The system also provides link to the listed documents.

Displayed information:

  • Type: The document type.
  • Doc Num: The document number.
  • Creation Date & Time
  • User: The user who created the document.
  • Quantity: The inventory difference.
  • Quantity per Uom: The conversion factor between the UoM and the base UoM.
  • Uom
  • Quantity per Uom2: The conversion factor between the second UoM and the base UoM.
  • Uom2
  • Batchnumber 1 & Batchnumber 2
  • Best Before Date
  • LUID
  • SSCC
  • Reason & Reason free text: The reason and the extra reason linked to the document.
  • Storage Location (The destination location)
  • Quality Status
  • Master LUID
  • Master SSCC

If the item is managed by serial numbers, the serial numbers linked to the selected document will be displayed in a separate section on the screen.

Receipts

6.5.2.2.7. Stock

The ‘Stock’ tab provides information on the current stock level of the item or batch in question.

Displayed information:

  • Item Code
  • Barcode
  • Description
  • Batchnumber1 & Batchnumber2
  • Best Before Date
  • LUID
  • SSCC
  • Warehouse: The code of the warehouse where the stock is located.
  • Storage location
  • Quality status
  • Quantity: The quantity measured in the inventory UoM.
  • Uom
  • Quantity2: The quantity measured in the second UoM.
  • Uom2
  • Supplier pallet number: The specific pallet number belonging the vendor.
  • Gr nr.: The document number of the Goods Receipt PO that created the inventory record.
  • Gr date: The Goods Receipt PO document date.
  • Supplier code and name
  • Master LUID
  • Master SSCC

If the item is managed by serial numbers, the serial numbers linked to the selected document will be displayed in a separate section on the screen.

Stock

6.5.2.2.8. Batch attributes

The ‘Batch attributes’ tab shows information regarding the batch attributes and the batch attribute value linked to the selected batch.

Batch attributes

Open the screen via the following path: Produmex > Reports > Print KPI reports.

This screen is used to print KPI reports. Set the criteria for the report on the screen.

Report type:
Select a report type. A following report types can be selected:

  • KPI Average time picking report
  • KPI lines per picker
  • KPI pick item time report
  • KPI sum deliveries
  • KPI Time management

Report:
Select a report. Every report with the selected report type can be selected.

Printer:
Select a printer.

From – To:
Define the reporting period.

Click on the ‘Preview’ button to see a preview.
Click on the ‘Print’ button to print the report.
Click on the ‘Cancel’ button to close the screen.

6.6. Interfacing

6.6.1. Interface monitor

Open the interface monitor via the following path: Produmex > Interfacing > Interface monitor.
On this screen it is possible to overview interfacing messages.

  • Type of message: Select a message type from the dropdown menu to filter the list.
  • Status: Select a status from the dropdown list. Possible values: ‘All’, ‘Error’, ‘New’, ‘Processed’.
  • Text filter: Add text to filter the list. Only list entries where the file name contains the entered text will be shown.
  • From - To: Define the period. Only entries from the selected period will be listed.

Click on the ‘Refresh’ button to apply the filters or to refresh the screen.

Displayed information:

  • Date: The date of the creation.
  • Time: The time of the creation.
  • Type: The type of the interfaced document.
  • File: The file name of the interfaced object.
  • Status: The status. Possible values:
    • ‘Error’: Failed interfacing
    • ‘New’: Running interfacing
    • ‘Processed’: Completed interfacing
  • Direction: The direction of the interfacing. Possible values: ‘Import’, ‘Export’ or ‘Mailed report’.
  • LinkedDocEntry: The DocEntry of the linked document.
  • Log: To see the log entry, click on the ‘Log’ button. A Log screen will open up.
  • Date: The date of the creation.
  • Time: The time of the creation.
  • Type: The type of the log. (The status of the entry.)
  • Message: The message linked to the log.

Click on the ‘Show file’ button to open the interfaced file. If a text editor is configured as the default application for the file extension, then the file can be modified and saved for reprocessing.
Click on the ‘Reprocess’ button to reprocess. The button is only active if the status of the line is ‘Error’.

6.6.2. Manual interfacing

Open the manual interfacing screen via the following path: Produmex > Interfacing > Manual interfacing. On this screen document exports and imports can be can be created.

Files will be exported to the folder defined with the ‘Interface monitor output path’ or the ‘WA: Interface monitor output path’ on the Config tab on the company level of the Organizational Structure.

6.6.2.1. Purchase order

Click on the button to export purchase orders. Adjust the settings of the interfacing on the ‘Interface for SBO purchase order im-/export’ controller. Please note: There is no standard extension for the export.

6.6.2.2. Items

Add an item to the textbox and click on the ‘Export items’ button to export item’s Item Master Data. When no item is added to the textbox, every item’s data will be exported. Adjust the settings of the interfacing on the ‘Interface for sbo item master data im-/export’ controller.

With the default controller, the file format will be xml and the following parameters will be exported:

  • Item number (item code)
  • Description
  • Item group
  • Barcode
  • Inventory item (Y/N)
  • Sales item (Y/N)
  • Purchase Item (Y/N)
  • Managed by batches (Y/N)
  • Managed by serial numbers (Y/N)
  • Has best before date (Y/N)
  • Has second batch number (Y/N)

6.6.2.3. Sales deliveries

Click on the button to export sales deliveries. Adjust the settings of the export on the ‘Interface for SBO purchase order im-/export’ controller.
Please note: There is no standard controller.

6.6.2.4. Stock request of WA

Click on the button to export stock request of warehouse automation. Adjust the settings of the export on the ’Warehouse automation’ controller.
Please note: There is no standard controller.

6.7. Support Tools

6.7.1. Run TeamViewer

In case of Produmex support asks you to join a TeamViewer meeting, go to the Support Tools folder and select ‘Run TeamViewer’. On the opening screen you can see your meeting ID and the password. If requested, copy your ID and the password and send it to Produmex support.

6.7.2. Run GoToMeeting

In the case of Produmex support asks you to run a GoTo meeting, click on Run GoToMeeting to start the meeting.

Please note: Produmex Support will only attend on prearranged meetings.

6.8. Stock selector

On some screens of SAP it will be possible to use the stock selector screen to easily select the Produmex stock. This screen will fill in the needed data into the UDF’s on the document line.

Supported documents:

  • Purchase return
  • Sales delivery
  • Sales invoice
  • Goods issue
  • Production issue

When an item is entered, the user can press the ‘Select stock’ button.
On the stock selection screen the user can select 1 or more lines he wants to add.
Quantities can be changed.

Please note that you need to select at least 1 line to proceed.

The stock lines shown in the editor are the free stock for that item. It does not take in account allocated stock for the base order of the document.

6.9. Free stock screen

This screen uses the view PMX_FREE_STOCK. This view gets the real free stock.

For some document types there are additional filters:

Sales delivery or sales invoice

  • Quality status that is allowed for shipping or shipping under quarantine
  • Stock not on a 'disallowed location'
    • The list of disallowed locations can be retrieved from the view PMX_DISALLOWED_LOCATIONS_FOR_PICKING

Issue for production

  • Quality status that is allowed for production

When this screen appears a user can select lines, if needed adjust quantities, and press the button 'OK' to add the stock to the document line.

Please note that there has to be a line selected when pressing 'OK'

6.10. Inventory revaluation

An additional ‘Get catch weight items’ button was added to the screen.
After clicking on this button, the grid is prefilled with catch weight items where a batch variance was detected based on the PMX_CWBV table.

An additional ‘Price by weight’ column was added to the grid.
When the valuation method of the catch weight item is ‘Moving average’ or ‘Standard’, after value has been entered in this field, the column 'New cost' will be filled up based on this calculation: {(Price by weight x total weight) / Number of pieces}.

Moving average/ Standard

When the valuation method is FIFO, then the different stock layers are displayed on the FIFO Layers grid. After a value has been entered to the ’Price by weight’ field, PMX fills the ’New Price’ field for each layer based on the calculation above. It is not possible to calculate the price by the weight for one layer only.

FIFO

When the valuation method is ‘Serial/Batch’ the ‘Price by weight’ column is also added to the Serial/Batches grid. Enter a price in this ‘Price by weight’ column for each batch. It is not possible to valuate every batch by adding the new price on the top grid.

Serial/Batch

7. Barcodes

7.1. Variable GTIN

Variable GTIN barcodes are GTIN barcodes, where a quantity is encoded in the barcode. This quantity can have different purposes, and the part of the barcode that holds the variable value can be different for each prefix.

This possibility in a GTIN barcode depends on the country where this product is used. This means that a certain prefix in a country could have a different meaning in another country.

To be able to handle this difference there is some configuration required to make the variable GTIN barcode scanning work in Produmex.

Variable GTIN configuration (UDT: PMX_VGTC)

Here the configuration of what prefixes are a variable GTIN barcode, and what purpose of the variable value means, is stored.

Item master data

On the item master data the fixed part of the variable GTIN barcode needs to be stored.
And a barcode type the value GTIN-Variable needs to be selected.

Example

Barcode on a label: 02801180070405

As a prefix the fixed part has been configured: 02801180.
The start index is 8, and length is 5.
This means that the following part is the variable part:
02801180070405

The number of decimals is 3, which results in a quantity of: 07.040 = 7.04

The purpose of this value is the 'Net weight in Kg'.

So if the barcode 02801180070405 gets scanned on our client, the following happens:

  • Check if the scanned barcode has a prefix available in the variable GTIN configuration
  • Yes:
    • Remove the variable part and check digit (This is the last digit) of the barcode: 02801180.
      This value will be matched against the item master data.
    • Get the value of the variable part: 7.04
    • Store that value in the field defined in the 'Value purpose' of the configuration: Net weight = 7.04 Kg.
  • No:
    • This will be regarded as a normal GTIN, and the barcode 02801180070405 will be matched against the item master data

8. Location suggestions

8.1 High level explanation

When the location suggestion is enabled, the system will suggest a location for the stock that is being moved in the following flows:

  • Reception (In case of receiving on location instead of dock)
  • Put away
  • Ad hoc moves
  • Move orders
  • Unpicking for production
  • Undo picking
  • Consolidated moves

When a destination location needs to be entered these flows will perform the following scenario:

  1. Check if location suggestions are enabled
  2. Enabled:
    1. Get list of suggested locations
    2. Show first suggested location on the screen
    3. Enter a location or select a location
      1. The list of suggested locations is displayed on the screen after the ‘Select location’ button is pressed
    4. When the location is not the first suggested location or an empty location:
      1. Enter a reason
  3. Not enabled:
    1. Enter a location or select a location
      1. All valid locations are allowed

8.2 Location controller - Handle location suggestions

The location suggestion can be enabled and configured on the location controller. When a location needs to be suggested, the list will only show locations that fit the requirements.

8.2.1 Use location suggestions?

The location suggestion can be disabled for a warehouse. If the destination warehouse has the setting 'UseLocationSuggestions' disabled, no location will be suggested from the warehouse and all valid locations can be selected when the stock is being moved.

8.2.2 Suggest locations

Get empty fixed pick location

A fixed pick location will be suggested first when all the following are verified:

  • If the ‘Allow to suggest an empty fixed pick location’ option is enabled on the Location Controller.
  • If there is only one item to be moved.
  • If there are empty fixed location(s) or empty location(s) which can be replenished.
  • If the batch to move is the oldest batch on a bulk location. (FEFO, Itri)
Get base locations

Next the system identifies the base location(s) for the item(s) to move. Base locations are used only for identifying the put away zones and will not be suggested by the system.

Base location(s) can be the following:

  • locations that are ‘Fixed’ and assigned to the item
  • locations that are ‘Can be replenished’ and assigned to the item
  • location is defined as the Standard location for the item on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data. Please note: if a standard zone is defined for the item, it’s not taken into account.

When multiple items are moved, all base locations for the items to move will be retrieved.

Get put away zones

Base locations can be linked to a put away zone, but should not belong to it. (The ‘Location belongs to the Put Away Zone’ option should not be checked). If a location belongs to a put away zone, it will not be considered as a base location.

After the system identifies the base locations, it executes a query to check if there are put away zones linked to the base locations.

When there are put away zone(s) linked to the base location(s), the put away zone(s) are used to identify the locations to be suggested and to define the order of these locations.

To define the order of the locations that can be suggested, the system uses the following logic:

  1. First it sorts the linked put away zones based on the sequence of the put away zone.
  2. Then starting from the first zone, it sorts the locations belonging to the zone. The locations belonging to the zone are sorted based on the pick sequence defined on the ‘General’ tab of the location. If the ‘Sort Pick Sequence Descending’ option is not enabled for the put away zone, the belonging locations are sorted ascending, otherwise the locations are sorted descending.

Example
In the example we move the item ‘Item A’. The item has no default storage location. The destination warehouse has the following locations:

Location Code P1.1.P1.2.A1.1.A1.2.A1.3.A2.1.A2.2.A2.3.
Fixed? (ITEM A)YNNNNNNN
Can be replenished? (ITEM A)NNNNNNNN
Put away zone (linked) Z1, Z2-------
Put away zone (belongs to) --Z1Z1Z1Z2Z2Z2

First the system identifies the base locations. In our example there is one base location:

  • P1.1., because it is fixed for Item A.

Next the system finds the put away zones. In our example there are two put away zones:

  • Z1, because it is linked to P1.1.
  • Z2, because it is linked to P1.1.

Finally the system will get the list of locations that belong to the identified put away zones. In the example the following locations belong to a zone:

Location Code A1.1.A1.2.A1.3.A2.1.A2.2.A2.3.
Put away zone (belongs to) Z1Z1Z2Z2Z2Z2
Pick sequence(belongs to) 123123

Scenario 1
Base location P1.1. has linked put away zones with the following configuration:

Put away zoneZ1Z2
Sort Pick Sequence DescendingNN
Sequence 12

When the system will get storage locations, it will use this order:
A1.1, A1.2, A1.3, A2.1, A2.2, A2.3

Scenario 2
Base location P1.1. has linked put away zones with the following configuration:

Put away zoneZ1Z2
Sort Pick Sequence DescendingNY
Sequence 12

When the system will get storage locations, it will use this order:
A1.1, A1.2, A1.3, A2.3, A2.2, A2.1

Get location suggestions

When there are put away zone(s) linked to the base location(s), only locations that belong to the put away zone(s) can be suggested.

When the base location(s) have no linked put away zones, all locations can be suggested.

When there are no base location(s), all locations can be suggested.

List location suggestions

After the locations that can be suggested are queried, the system filters and sorts the list in order to list location suggestions.

Filtering
  • A location is not allowed if the item cannot be stored on the location based on the zone type.
  • A location is not allowed if the item cannot be stored on the location based on the fixed items of the location.
  • A location is not allowed if the maximum number of logistic units will be exceeded.
  • A location is not allowed if the ‘Block move when location is not empty’ option is enabled for the location and the location is not empty.
  • A location is not allowed if the Item Storage Location type of the location is not the same as the Item Storage Location Type of the item. If there are multiple items to move that have different location types, every location with one of the Item Storage Location Types linked to the item are allowed.
  • Only bulk locations are allowed if the ‘Allow to suggest pick locations during moves/put away’ option is not enabled on the Location Controller
  • A location is not allowed if the ‘Block move when location is not empty’ option is enabled for the location and the location is not empty.
  • If pick locations are allowed, but the ‘Can be put on a pick location’ option is disabled for the quality status of the stock to be moved, then no pick locations can be suggested

Please note: The quality status allowed on the location is not taken into account during the filtering of the locations.

Sorting

After the list of locations is filtered, the system sorts the remaining locations. The found locations will be sorted by the Order by clause defined on the location controller. However there are a few additional rules:

  • When enabled, an empty fixed pick location will be suggested first (See Get fixed pick location section).
  • Next the suggested locations are added
  • In case a flow first builds a list of moves, before adding them to the database, a list of already selected locations is kept in memory. When the suggested location is a location that has already been selected, it will be added to the suggested locations after the 'normal' suggested location. This is to avoid always showing the same location as the first suggested location.
  • If a suggested location is actually the source location to move from, it will be added to the bottom of the list.

When the ’Force to use first suggested location during moves/put away’ option is enabled on the location controller, the user has to select a reason in order to proceed if the scanned/selected location is not the first suggested location or an empty location. Every reason with the flag 'Use for standard flow deviation' can be selected. The selected reason and the first suggested location is stored in the PMX_MVLI table.

9. Packing flows

Because the packing station is a fixed location, most of the packing flows run on a fixed touchscreen terminal. The flows on the touchscreen terminal vary in the inputs used for identifying the items to be packed.

  • Packing flow: the flow uses movable location(s) as input
  • Consolidated packing flow: the flow uses pick list(s) and logistic unit(s) as input.
  • Item packing flow: the flow uses a moveable location as an input, but the pick list can be identified by scanning an item.
  • Cash register packing: the flow uses a pick list as an input. The user can perform the picking and packing in one step.

Produmex also provides a packing flow called Mobile packing flow which runs on a scanner. Because the flow does not need a fixed touchscreen, there are less constraints for the packing process with respect to the available packing stations.

Creating button specific barcodes

During the packing flows running on a fixed touchscreen terminal, different buttons will be enabled for you on the screen. There are six buttons, which you do not necessarily have to press on the screen:

  1. Add SSCC
  2. Enter cart manually
  3. Add items
  4. Finish logistic unit
  5. Select all
  6. Skip items

Instead, you have the option to create barcodes which you can scan. The barcode needs to start with '<BUTTON>' and then you need to add the translation key of the given button.

ButtonExamples for barcodes
1.Add SSCC <BUTTON>MSG_BUTTON_PACKING_ADD_SSCC
2.Enter cart manually <BUTTON>MSG_BUTTON_PACKING_IDENTIFY_CART
3.Add items <BUTTON>MSG_BUTTON_PACKING_ADD_ITEMS
4.Finish logistic unit <BUTTON>MSG_BUTTON_PACKING_FINISH_PALLET
5.Select all <BUTTON>MSG_BUTTON_SELECT_ALL
6.Skip items <BUTTON>MSG_BUTTON_PACKING_SKIP_ITEMS

Example
On the first screen below you have the option to press the button Add items manually. Instead of pressing the button, you can scan your barcode and the system will press the button automatically.

Both actions will navigate you to the next screen where you can proceed with the Finish logistic unit button.

In the next sections you will have several opportunities to use the six buttons. Whenever any of them is mentioned, please keep in mind that you can scan your own button specific barcode instead.

9.1. Packing

Select a packing lineIdentify moveable locationAdd itemsFinish logistic unit

Note: It is possible to set the touchscreen to be only used for the Packing flow: In the Organizational Structure select the MainTouchPackingFlow for the thin client. For more information about the thin client settings see: 5.2.10. Thin client settings.

9.1.1. Select a packing line

Select a packing line where the items that have to be packed are located.

9.1.2. Identify moveable location

After selecting a packing line, scan the moveable location on which the items currently are or tap the Enter cart manually button and enter the code of the moveable location by using the keyboard.

When there are items picked for multiple customers onto that moveable location, the system displays a list of these customers. Select a customer/address and proceed by tapping the right arrow button. When there are items for only one customer on the moveable location, the system automatically proceeds with that customer.

9.1.3. Select a task

When the Allow to create master SSCC option is enabled on the Pick list controller, it is possible to create a master SSCC during the packing. On the Select a task screen tap the Create master SSCC button to pack onto a master SSCC. Tap the Create normal SSCC button to pick onto a normal SSCC.

When the Use pallet packing type from customer master data option is enabled on the on the Packing controller and the Pallet packing type is Multiple Pallet, Pallet –multiple carton or Ask user, add the number of identical logistic units as well.

In the case of working with master SSCCs, first add the number of the identical master SSCCs and then add the number of identical sub SSCCs on a single master SSCC.

9.1.4. Adjust quantity and select items

On the next screen the system displays the list of the items picked into the movable location. You can use the input field to filter the list.

Select items

Displayed information:
At the top left corner the system shows the name of the customer and the shipping address.

At the top right corner the system displays the picklist number(s), the SSCC number and the pick and pack remarks.

Note: When packing on multiple SSCCs, the system displays the text Multiple SSCCs.

Additional information displayed on the screen: barcode, item code, item description, batch number, best before date and total quantity.

The total quantity marks the open quantity on the moveable location.

  • When packing on multiple SSCCs, the total quantity marks the total quantity on the moveable location / the number of identical SSCCs.
  • When packing on multiple identical master and sub SSCC, the total quantity marks the total quantity on the moveable location / (the number of identical master SSCCs * number of identical sub SSCCs)

Grouped items
By default, the system groups the items that have the same identical item number, batch1 number and best before date. You can ungroup and then regroup the items by clicking the button button.
If the grouped lines have items managed by serial numbers, the system asks you to scan the serial numbers by picklist lines as a next step in the flow.

Items ungrouped

Adjust quantity

By default, the system displays the total quantity in the Quantity to pack section. The maximum quantity that can be packed is the total quantity on the line.

Adjust the quantity by tapping + or - in the Quantity to pack section. The quantity can also be entered by using a keyboard. Click on the quantity field and enter the quantity on the keyboard. Press Enter to close the keyboard.

Adjust quantity on keyboard

Select items

Select the items to be packed by clicking on the line or use the Select all button to select all the items on the list.

Select items

9.1.5. Add items

If at least one item is selected, the Add items button becomes active. Tap the button and the selected items are moved onto the logistic unit.

The items that have already been packed are not displayed on the list. Packed items cannot be removed from the logistic unit.

When at least one item is packed onto the logistic unit, the system creates a LUID for it. After the LUID is generated, it is displayed on the screen.

Add items

Scanning an external SSCC
If the Allow the input of an external SSCC? and Force user to rescan SSCC settings are enabled on the Packing Controller, the system displays the Scan an SSCC screen when the first item is added and allows for scanning an external SSCC instead of generating a new SSCC automatically.

After scanning an SSCC, each time you add a new item to the logistic unit, you must rescan the SSCC to ensure that the item is added to the appropriate logistic unit. If the wrong SSCC is scanned, the system displays an error message and does not allow the item to be added to the logistic unit. You must scan the appropriate SSCC (or select a different item and then scan the appropriate SSCC) to proceed with the flow.

Scan an SSCC

9.1.6. Add cart

New items for the same customer can be added to the list of possible items to pack. For adding items from another moveable location, scan the barcode or tap the Enter cart manually button and enter the code.

9.1.7. Finish logistic unit

If there is at least one item packed into the logistic unit, the Finish logistic unit button becomes active.

Finish logistic unit

Tap the Finish logistic unit button and the system prints the SSCC label. (Packing: finished logistic unit event (500) print event) After finishing a logistic unit, the system displays the shipping dock where to logistic unit has to be moved.

When creating a master SSCC during the picking and tapping the Finish logistic unit button, the system asks whether you wish to finish the master SSCC or the sub SSCC.

Tap the Master SSCC is full button to finish the master SSCC. After finishing the master logistic unit, the system prints the labels for the master and the sub logistic units and displays the dock where the master logistic unit has to be moved. On the next screen declare whether you would like to start a master or a sub SSCC.

Tap the Sub SSCC is full button to finish the sub SSCC. The picking will be continued onto a new sub SSCC, but onto the same master SSCC.

If every item is packed and ‘Automatic shipping’ is enabled for the shipping type of the base document, the Master SSCC is not finished screen is opened. Tap the Yes button to finish the master SSCC as well.

On the next screen the select a logistic unit to pack on or tap the Start new logistic unit button to create a new logistic unit.

9.1.7.1. Capture weight

If the ‘Ask weight?’ or ‘Ask weight Sub SSCC?’ option is set to true on the Produmex pick list types user table for the pick list, and there is a scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the weight of the logistic unit can be measured on the connected scale after the logistic unit is finished.

Make sure that conversions between the units of measurements are set up correctly on the Units of Measure - Setup (OUOM) and Weight - Setup (OWGT) SBO standard tables.

  1. The measured weight. The UoM is the UoM defined for the scale. The number of decimals displayed depends on the scale accuracy.
    This field is automatically filled with the weight measured on the connected scale. It is possible to manually overwrite the measured weight.
    If the weight is manually added or the connection to the scale is lost, the value starts flickering in red.
  2. If the scale has a defined zero command, the ‘Zero’ button is displayed.
  3. If the scale has a defined tare command, the ‘Tare’ button is displayed.
  4. The code of the connected scale.
  5. If there are more than one scales defined under the dock/packing line, an additional Switch scale button is displayed on the screen. Tap this button to change the scale.
    On the next screen select the scale from the list. Every scale defined under the dock/packing line is listed. After switching the scale, the screen will use the chosen scale. After proceeding with the flow, and a new weight needs to be captured, the standard logic to choose a scale is used. This means that switching scale only switches the scale for the current weighing.
  6. SSCC number of the logistic unit.
  7. Theoretical weight: The theoretical weight is the sum of the weight of the items on the logistic unit. The item weight can be defined on the Sales tab of the Item Master Data.
  8. In the case of master SSCC’s, an additional Sub SSCC’s weight value is shown. The value is calculated as the sum of the measured weight of the Sub SSCC’s.
9.1.7.2. Enter dimensions

If the Ask weight?/ Ask weight Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, and there is no scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the user has to enter the weight of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished. The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Weight UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

Based on the pick list type settings, the user might have to enter the dimension(s) of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished.

When there are package dimensions defined on the Package Dimensions table, the user can select a predefined dimension instead of entering the length, the width and the height manually. The ’Select a package’ screen opens. On this screen every package dimension that is not cancelled is listed. Select a dimension from the list or tap the Enter dimensions manually button.

When the Enter dimensions manually button is tapped or there are no package dimensions defined, the user has to enter the dimensions manually.

  • If the Ask length?/ Ask length Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the length of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask width?/ Ask width Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the width of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask height?/ Ask height Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the height of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.

The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Length UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

9.1.8. Skip items

It is possible that there are goods that cannot be packed. Continue the packing until only products that cannot be packed are listed on the screen.
Tap the Skip all items button to skip every remaining item.

On the next screen confirm that you would like to skip the remaining items.

Confirm skipping

The system proceeds to the Select a reason screen.
Select a reason from the list. Every reason that can be used for picking is listed.

Select a reason

On the next screen define where the skipped items should be moved.

  • To move the items onto an SSCC, scan the SSCC. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location as described below.
  • To create a new SSCC, tap the New SSCC button then identify the destination location as described below. If configured, the 700 - WHS: created LU print event is triggered and the logistic label is printed.
  • Scan the destination location or select it from a list.
    • Tap the Select location button to list every active location from the warehouse.
    • Tap the Select empty location button to list every empty active location from the warehouse.

Please note: If no SSCC is created or selected, the items will be moved without a linked logistic unit.

Select destination

After the destination location is defined, the system removes the locking from the skipped products and updates the pick list.

  • If the total quantity on the pick list line is skipped, the system adds the selected reason to the pick list line and closes it.
  • If the pick list line is partially skipped, the ‘Open’ and ‘Picked’ quantity of the pick list line is updated with the packed quantity. A closed line will be added with the quantity and the details of the skipped product and the selected reason.

After the lockings are removed, the skipped products are moved onto the selected logistic unit or destination location. Then the system returns to the Select moveable location screen where the user can continue the packing.

9.1.9. Restarting the flow

The flow can be continued after an abortion. Restart the flow and select the packing location. If there are a moveable location, scan the moveable location as well. Then the system will offer the option to choose from the existing logistic units or to start a new one.

After selecting the logistic unit, scan the SSCC barcode on the logistic unit.

9.1.10. Continue the packing onto an already packed logistic unit

When there are already packed logistic unit(s) for the selected customer or shipping address, the system will offer the option to choose from the existing logistic unit(s) or to start a new one. After selecting a logistic unit, scan the SSCC barcode on it.

9.2. Consolidated packing

9.2.1. Consolidated packing flow (creating SSCC number)

This flow takes place when logistic units were used instead of movable locations during the picking. The flow uses the logistic unit(s) as an input and an SSCC number is created.
Before starting the picking flow, set the following configurations:

Consolidated packing flow

Select a packing lineSelect a picklist#select_a_picklistScan an SSCCPack and add itemsAdd SSCCFinish SSCC
9.2.1.1. Select a packing line

Select a packing line where the items that have to be packed are located.

9.2.1.2. Select a picklist

After selecting a packing location, the system will display the list of the pick lists which have been picked to the zone linked to the packing location.

Select a pick list from the list and proceed by tapping the right arrow.

9.2.1.3. Scan an SSCC

Scan the SSCC barcode on the logistic unit. (Logistic units cannot be selected from the list.)

9.2.1.4. Select a task

If the Allow to create master SSCC option is enabled on the Pick list controller, it is possible to create a master SSCC during the packing. On the Select a task screen tap the ‘Create master SSCC’ button to pack onto a master SSCC. Tap the Create normal SSCC button to pick onto a normal SSCC.

When the ‘Use pallet packing type from customer master data’ option is enabled on the on the Packing controller and the Pallet packing type is ‘Multiple Pallet’, ‘Pallet –multiple carton’ or ‘Ask user’, add the number of identical logistic units as well.

In the case of working with master SSCC’s, first add the number of the identical master SSCC’s, then add the number of identical sub SSCC’s on a single master SSCC.

9.2.1.5. Adjust quantity and select items

On the next screen the system displays the list of the items picked into the movable location. You can use the input field to filter the list.

Select items

Displayed information:
At the top left corner the system shows the name of the customer and the shipping address.

At the top right corner the system displays the picklist number(s) and the pick and pack remarks.

Additional information displayed on the screen: barcode, item code, item description, batch number, best before date and total quantity.

The total quantity marks the open quantity on the moveable location.

  • When packing on multiple SSCCs, the total quantity marks the total quantity on the moveable location / the number of identical SSCCs.
  • When packing on multiple identical master and sub SSCC, the total quantity marks the total quantity on the moveable location / (the number of identical master SSCCs * number of identical sub SSCCs)

Grouped items
By default, the system groups the items that have the same identical item number, batch1 number and best before date. You can ungroup and then regroup the items by clicking the button button.
If the grouped lines have items managed by serial numbers, the system asks you to scan the serial numbers by picklist lines as a next step in the flow.

Group and ungroup items

Adjust quantity

By default, the system displays the total quantity in the Quantity to pack section. The maximum quantity that can be packed is the total quantity on the line.

Adjust the quantity by tapping + or - in the Quantity to pack section. The quantity can also be entered by using a keyboard. Click on the quantity field and enter the quantity on the keyboard. Press Enter to close the keyboard.

Adjust quantity on keyboard

Select items

Select the items to be packed by clicking on the line or use the Select all button to select all the items on the list.

Select all items

9.2.1.6. Add items

If at least one item is selected, the Add items button becomes active. Tap the button and the selected items are moved onto the logistic unit.

The items that have already been packed are not displayed on the list. Packed items cannot be removed from the logistic unit.

When at least one item is packed onto the logistic unit, the system creates a LUID for it. After the LUID is generated, it is displayed on the screen.

Add items

9.2.1.7. Add SSCC

New items for the same customer can be added to the list of possible items to pack. For adding items from another moveable location, scan the barcode or tap the Add SSCC button and enter the code.

9.2.1.8. Finish SSCC

If there is at least one item packed into the logistic unit, the ‘Finish logistic unit’ button will be active. After tapping the Finish logistic unit button, the system prints the SSCC label. (Packing: finished logistic unit event (500) print event) After finishing a logistic unit, the system displays the shipping dock where to logistic unit has to be moved.

When creating a master SSCC during the picking, after the Finish logistic unit button has been tapped, the system asks whether to finish the master SSCC or the sub SSCC.

Tap the Master SSCC is full button to finish the master SSCC. After finishing the master logistic unit, the system prints the labels for the master and the sub logistic units and displays the dock where the master logistic unit has to be moved. On the next screen declare whether you would like to start a master or a sub SSCC.

Tap the Sub SSCC is full button to finish the sub SSCC. The picking will be continued onto a new sub SSCC, but onto the same master SSCC.

If every item is packed and Automatic shipping is enabled for the shipping type of the base document, the Master SSCC is not finished screen is opened. Tap the Yes button to finish the master SSCC as well.

On the next screen the select a logistic unit to pack on or tap the Start new logistic unit button to create a new logistic unit.

9.2.1.8. Finish SSCC / Capture weight

If the Ask weight? or Ask weight Sub SSCC? option is set to true on the Produmex pick list types user table for the picklist, and there is a scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the weight of the logistic unit can be measured on the connected scale after the logistic unit is finished.

Make sure that conversions between the units of measurements are set up correctly on the Units of Measure - Setup (OUOM) and Weight - Setup (OWGT) SBO standard tables.

  1. The measured weight. The UoM is the UoM defined for the scale. The number of decimals displayed depends on the scale accuracy.
    This field is automatically filled with the weight measured on the connected scale. It is possible to manually overwrite the measured weight.
    If the weight is manually added or the connection to the scale is lost, the value starts flickering in red.
  2. If the scale has a defined zero command, the Zero button is displayed.
  3. If the scale has a defined tare command, the Tare button is displayed.
  4. The code of the connected scale.
  5. If there are more than one scales defined under the dock/packing line, an additional Switch scale button is displayed on the screen. Tap this button to change the scale.
    On the next screen select the scale from the list. Every scale defined under the dock/packing line is listed. After switching the scale, the screen will use the chosen scale. After proceeding with the flow, and a new weight needs to be captured, the standard logic to choose a scale is used. This means that switching scale only switches the scale for the current weighing.
  6. SSCC number of the logistic unit.
  7. Theoretical weight: The theoretical weight is the sum of the weight of the items on the logistic unit. The item weight can be defined on the Sales tab of the Item Master Data.
  8. In the case of master SSCC’s, an additional Sub SSCC’s weight value is shown. The value is calculated as the sum of the measured weight of the Sub SSCC’s.
9.2.1.8. Finish SSCC / Enter dimensions

If the Ask weight?/ Ask weight Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, and there is no scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the user has to enter the weight of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished. The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Weight UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

Based on the pick list type settings, the user might have to enter the dimension(s) of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished.

When there are package dimensions defined on the Package Dimensions table, the user can select a predefined dimension instead of entering the length, the width and the height manually. The ’Select a package’ screen opens. On this screen every package dimension that is not cancelled is listed. Select a dimension from the list or tap the Enter dimensions manually button.

When the Enter dimensions manually button is tapped or there are no package dimensions defined, the user has to enter the dimensions manually.

  • If the Ask length?/ Ask length Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the length of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask width?/ Ask width Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the width of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask height?/ Ask height Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the height of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.

The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Length UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

9.2.1.9. Skip items

It is possible that there are goods that cannot be packed. Continue the packing until only products that cannot be packed are listed on the screen.
Tap the Skip all items button to skip every remaining item.

On the next screen confirm that you would like to skip the remaining items.

Confirm skipping

The system proceeds to the Select a reason screen.
Select a reason from the list. Every reason that can be used for picking is listed.

Select a reason

On the next screen define where the skipped items should be moved.

  • To move the items onto an SSCC, scan the SSCC. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location as described below.
  • To create a new SSCC, tap the New SSCC button then identify the destination location as described below. If configured, the 700 - WHS: created LU print event is triggered and the logistic label is printed.
  • Scan the destination location or select it from a list.
    • Tap the Select location button to list every active location from the warehouse.
    • Tap the Select empty location button to list every empty active location from the warehouse.

Please note: If no SSCC is created or selected, the items will be moved without a linked logistic unit.

Select destination

After the destination location is defined, the system removes the locking from the skipped products and updates the pick list.

  • If the total quantity on the pick list line is skipped, the system adds the selected reason to the pick list line and closes it.
  • If the pick list line is partially skipped, the ‘Open’ and ‘Picked’ quantity of the pick list line is updated with the packed quantity. A closed line will be added with the quantity and the details of the skipped product and the selected reason.

After the lockings are removed, the skipped products are moved onto the selected logistic unit or destination location. Then the system returns to the Select moveable location screen where the user can continue the packing.

9.2.1.10. Restarting the flow

The flow can be continued after an abortion. Restart the flow and select the packing location. If there are a moveable location, scan the moveable location as well. Then the system will offer the option to choose from the existing logistic units or to start a new one.

After selecting the logistic unit, scan the SSCC barcode on the logistic unit.

9.2.1.11. Continue the packing onto an already packed logistic unit

When there are already packed logistic unit(s) for the selected customer or shipping address, the system will offer the option to choose from the existing logistic unit(s) or to start a new one. After selecting a logistic unit, scan the SSCC barcode on it.

9.2.2. Consolidated packing flow (keeping SSCC number)

This flow can be used to double check the content of the carton boxes/logistic units prepared during the Prepare carts and Multi-picking flows. The flow keeps the SSCC number added to the carton boxes during the Prepare carts flow and it will only fully confirm or reject the content.

Before starting the picking flow, set the following configurations:

Bild1551973500769

Prepare cartsMulti-pickingSelect a packing locationSelect a picklistScan an SSCCAdd itemsLogistic unit is finished.Shipping flow
9.2.2.1. Select a packing location

Select a packing line where the logistic units to be checked are located.

Select a packing location

9.2.2.2. Select a picklist

After selecting a packing location, the system will display the list of the picklists which have been picked to the zone linked to the packing location.

Select a picklist from the list and proceed by pressing the right arrow.

Select a picklist

9.2.2.3. Scan an SSCC

Scan the SSCC barcode of the logistic unit.
Even if multiple SSCC's are available to be scanned, only one SSCC can be scanned at a time.

Please note that logistic units cannot be selected from the list.

Scan an SSCC

9.2.2.4. Add items

On the next screen you can see that the flow keeps the SSCC number and displays it on the upper right corner of the screen. Click Add items.

Please note that in this scenario all items need to be packed at the same time. It is not possible to partially pack because the goods are stored in the same SSCC. All the goods that are on the SSCC will be displayed and automatically selected. It is not possible to adjust the quantity or de-select a line.

9.2.2.5. Logistic unit is finished

After tapping the Add items button, the system automatically performs the Finish logistic unit functionality. The packed SSCC is ready for shipping and moved to the destination location defined in the picklist.

9.2.2.6. Skip all items

In this process it is not possible to partially pack, therefore the goods in the box are either complete and can be packed, or there is something wrong (for example items missing, there are more items than necessary in the box, etc.), in which case all items need to be skipped.

Tap the Skip all items button and on the next screen confirm that you wish to skip all the items.

The system proceeds to the Select a reason screen.
Select a reason from the list. Every reason that can be used for picking is listed.

Select a reason

On the next screen define where the skipped items should be moved.

  • To move the items onto an SSCC, scan the SSCC. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location as described below.
  • To create a new SSCC, press the New SSCC button then identify the destination location as described below. If configured, the 700 - WHS: created LU print event is triggered and the logistic label is printed.
  • Scan the destination location or select it from a list.
    • Press the Select location button to list every active location from the warehouse.
    • Press the Select empty location button to list every empty active location from the warehouse.

Please note: If no SSCC is created or selected, the items will be moved without a linked logistic unit.

Select destination

After the destination location is defined, the system removes the locking from the skipped products and updates the picklist. The system adds the selected reason to the pick list line and closes it.

After the locking is removed, the skipped products are moved onto the selected logistic unit or destination location. Then the system returns to the Select a picklist screen where the user can continue the packing.

9.3. Item packing

9.3.1. Select a packing line

Select a packing line where the items that have to be packed are located.

9.3.2. Identify moveable location

After selecting a packing location, scan the moveable location on which the items currently are or tap the Enter cart manually button and enter the code of the moveable location.

9.3.3. Select task

If the Allow to create master SSCC option is enabled on the Pick list controller, it is possible to create a master SSCC during the packing. On the Select a task screen tap the Create master SSCC button to pack onto a master SSCC. Tap the Create normal SSCC button to pick onto a normal SSCC.

If the Use pallet packing type from customer master data option is enabled on the on the Packing controller and the Pallet packing type is Multiple Pallet, Pallet –multiple carton or Ask user, add the number of identical logistic units as well.

When working with master SSCCs, first add the number of the identical master SSCCs and then add the number of identical sub SSCCs on a single master SSCC.

9.3.4. Scan items

The next screen shows the list of items that have been picked onto the moveable location.

By default, the item quantity is 0 because the flow allows to define the quantity by scanning. The item quantity cannot exceed the total quantity. Only items on the list can be scanned, otherwise an error message is displayed.

Scan items

Grouped items
By default, the system groups the items that have the same identical item number, batch1 number and best before date. You can ungroup and then regroup the items by clicking the button button.
If the grouped lines have items managed by serial numbers, the system asks you to scan the serial numbers by picklist lines as a next step in the flow.

Items ungrouped

Scan item barcodes
Start scanning the item barcodes. After scanning the first item, the system automatically selects a customer and the address based on which customer ordered the least amount of the scanned item. The system shows the name of the customer, the shipping address and the picklist number(s).

After scanning the first item, only those items are displayed on the list that have been picked for the customer. The system selects scanned items.

Note: When using only the touchscreen, select an item by tapping on the line. After selecting the first item, the system automatically identifies the customer. After the first selection, only those items are displayed that have been picked for the customer.

9.3.5. Adjust quantity and select items

On the next screen the system displays the list of the items picked into the movable location. You can use the input field to filter the list.

Grouped items
By default, the system groups the items that have the same identical item number, batch1 number and best before date. You can ungroup and then regroup the items by clicking the button button.
If the grouped lines have items managed by serial numbers, the system asks you to scan the serial numbers by picklist lines as a next step in the flow.

Select items

Displayed information:
At the top left corner the system shows the name of the customer and the shipping address.

At the top right corner the system displays the picklist number(s), the SSCC number and the pick and pack remarks.

Note: When packing on multiple SSCCs, the system displays the text Multiple SSCCs.

Additional information displayed on the screen: barcode, item code, item description, batch number, best before date and total quantity.

The total quantity marks the open quantity on the moveable location.

  • When packing on multiple SSCCs, the total quantity marks the total quantity on the moveable location / the number of identical SSCCs.
  • When packing on multiple identical master and sub SSCC, the total quantity marks the total quantity on the moveable location / (the number of identical master SSCCs * number of identical sub SSCCs)

Adjust quantity

By default, the system displays the total quantity in the Quantity to pack section. The maximum quantity that can be packed is the total quantity on the line.

Adjust the quantity by tapping + or - in the Quantity to pack section. The quantity can also be entered by using a keyboard. Click on the quantity field and enter the quantity on the keyboard. Press Enter to close the keyboard.

Adjust quantity on keyboard

Select items

Select the items to be packed by clicking on the line or use the Select all button to select all the items on the list.

Select items

9.3.6. Add items

If at least one item is selected, the Add items button becomes active. Tap the button and the selected items are moved onto the logistic unit.

The items that have already been packed are not displayed on the list. Packed items cannot be removed from the logistic unit.

When at least one item is packed onto the logistic unit, the system creates a LUID for it. After the LUID is generated, it is displayed on the screen.

Add items

Scanning an external SSCC
If the Allow the input of an external SSCC? and Force user to rescan SSCC settings are enabled on the Packing Controller, the system displays the Scan an SSCC screen when the first item is added and allows for scanning an external SSCC instead of generating a new SSCC automatically.

After scanning an SSCC, each time you add a new item to the logistic unit, you must rescan the SSCC to ensure that the item is added to the appropriate logistic unit. If the wrong SSCC is scanned, the system displays an error message and does not allow the item to be added to the logistic unit. You must scan the appropriate SSCC (or select a different item and then scan the appropriate SSCC) to proceed with the flow.

Scan an SSCC

9.3.7. Add cart

New items for the same customer can be added to the list of possible items to pack. For adding items from another moveable location, scan the barcode or tap the Enter cart manually button and enter the code.

9.3.8. Finish logistic unit

If there is at least one item packed into the logistic unit, the Finish logistic unit button becomes active.

Finish logistic unit

Tap the Finish logistic unit button and the system prints the SSCC label (Packing: finished logistic unit event (500) print event).

After finishing a logistic unit, the system displays the shipping dock where to logistic unit has to be moved.

When creating a master SSCC during the picking, after the Finish logistic unit button has been tapped, the system asks whether you want to finish the master SSCC or the sub SSCC.

Tap the Master SSCC is full button to finish the master SSCC. After finishing the master logistic unit, the system prints the labels for the master and the sub logistic units and displays the dock where the master logistic unit has to be moved. On the next screen declare whether you would like to start a master or a sub SSCC.

Tap the Sub SSCC is full button to finish the sub SSCC. The picking is continued onto a new sub SSCC, but onto the same master SSCC.

If every item is packed and Automatic shipping is enabled for the shipping type of the base document, the Master SSCC is not finished screen is opened. Tap the Yes button to finish the master SSCC as well.

On the next screen the select a logistic unit to pack on or tap the Start new logistic unit button to create a new logistic unit.

9.1.8.1. Capture weight

If the ‘Ask weight?’ or ‘Ask weight Sub SSCC?’ option is set to true on the Produmex pick list types user table for the pick list, and there is a scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the weight of the logistic unit can be measured on the connected scale after the logistic unit is finished.

Make sure that conversions between the units of measurements are set up correctly on the Units of Measure - Setup (OUOM) and Weight - Setup (OWGT) SBO standard tables.

  1. The measured weight. The UoM is the UoM defined for the scale. The number of decimals displayed depends on the scale accuracy.
    This field is automatically filled with the weight measured on the connected scale. It is possible to manually overwrite the measured weight.
    If the weight is manually added or the connection to the scale is lost, the value starts flickering in red.
  2. If the scale has a defined zero command, the Zero button is displayed.
  3. If the scale has a defined tare command, the Tare button is displayed.
  4. The code of the connected scale.
  5. If there are more than one scales defined under the dock/packing line, an additional Switch scale button is displayed on the screen. Tap this button to change the scale.
    On the next screen select the scale from the list. Every scale defined under the dock/packing line is listed. After switching the scale, the screen will use the chosen scale. After proceeding with the flow, and a new weight needs to be captured, the standard logic to choose a scale is used. This means that switching scale only switches the scale for the current weighing.
  6. SSCC number of the logistic unit.
  7. Theoretical weight: The theoretical weight is the sum of the weight of the items on the logistic unit. The item weight can be defined on the Sales tab of the Item Master Data.
  8. In the case of master SSCC’s, an additional Sub SSCC’s weight value is shown. The value is calculated as the sum of the measured weight of the Sub SSCC’s.
9.1.8.2. Enter dimensions

If the Ask weight?/ Ask weight Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, and there is no scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the user has to enter the weight of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished. The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Weight UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

Based on the pick list type settings, the user might have to enter the dimension(s) of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished.

When there are package dimensions defined on the Package Dimensions table, the user can select a predefined dimension instead of entering the length, the width and the height manually. The ’Select a package’ screen opens. On this screen every package dimension that is not cancelled is listed. Select a dimension from the list or tap the Enter dimensions manually button.

When the Enter dimensions manually button is tapped or there are no package dimensions defined, the user has to enter the dimensions manually.

  • If the Ask length?/ Ask length Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the length of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask width?/ Ask width Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the width of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask height?/ Ask height Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the height of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.

The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Length UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

9.3.9. Skip items

It is possible that there are goods that cannot be packed. Continue the packing until only products that cannot be packed are listed on the screen.
Tap the Skip all items button to skip every remaining item.

On the next screen confirm that you would like to skip the remaining items.

Confirm skipping

The system proceeds to the Select a reason screen.
Select a reason from the list. Every reason that can be used for picking is listed.

Select a reason

On the next screen define where the skipped items should be moved.

  • To move the items onto an SSCC, scan the SSCC. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location as described below.
  • To create a new SSCC, tap the New SSCC button then identify the destination location as described below. If configured, the 700 - WHS: created LU print event is triggered and the logistic label is printed.
  • Scan the destination location or select it from a list.
    • Tap the Select location button to list every active location from the warehouse.
    • Tap the Select empty location button to list every empty active location from the warehouse.

Please note: If no SSCC is created or selected, the items will be moved without a linked logistic unit.

Select destination

After the destination location is defined, the system removes the locking from the skipped products and updates the pick list.

  • If the total quantity on the pick list line is skipped, the system adds the selected reason to the pick list line and closes it.
  • If the pick list line is partially skipped, the ‘Open’ and ‘Picked’ quantity of the pick list line is updated with the packed quantity. A closed line will be added with the quantity and the details of the skipped product and the selected reason.

After the lockings are removed, the skipped products are moved onto the selected logistic unit or destination location. Then the system returns to the Select moveable location screen where the user can continue the packing.

9.3.10. Restarting the flow

The flow can be continued after an abortion. Restart the flow and select the packing location. If there are a moveable location, scan the moveable location as well. Then the system will offer the option to choose from the existing logistic units or to start a new one.

After selecting the logistic unit, scan the SSCC barcode on the logistic unit.

9.3.11. Continue the packing onto an already packed logistic unit

When there are already packed logistic unit(s) for the selected customer or shipping address, the system will offer the option to choose from the existing logistic unit(s) or to start a new one. After selecting a logistic unit, scan the SSCC barcode on it.

9.4. Mobile packing

This flow is available in the scanner mode. In the mobile packing flow the system do not display the maximum quantity to pack. The flow is used for a second verification whether the picked quantities are correct.

Select a packing lineIdentify moveable locationPack itemAdd chartFinish SSCC

To initiate the flow, press on the ‘Mobile packing’ function from the ‘Sales’ menu.

9.4.1. Select a packing line

Select a packing line where the items that have to be packed are located.

9.4.2. Identify moveable location

Scan the moveable location on which the items currently are or press the ‘Select moveable location’ button and select it from the list.

After identifying the moveable location, select a customer/ address from the list.

9.4.3. Pack item

Then identify items by scanning or selecting from a list (press the ‘Select a product’ button.) Add the quantity with the + / - buttons. There is no limit to the entered quantity, but the system will display an error message if the entered quantity exceeds the picked quantity still available on the moveable location. Press the right arrow to proceed. After the first item is packed onto the logistic unit, the system creates a LUID for it.

9.4.4. Add chart

It is possible to add items from another moveable location, if the items were picked for the selected customer. Select the ‘Other moveable location’ button.

9.4.5. Finish SSCC

If there are at least one item packed onto the logistic unit, the ‘Finish logistic unit’ button will be available. When pressing this button, the packing onto the logistic unit is finished. The system prints the SSCC label (Packing: finished logistic unit event (500) print event) and displays the shipping dock where to logistic unit has to be moved.

When there are still picked items on the moveable location, the packing can be continued onto another logistic unit.

After packing all the picked items for the customer from the moveable location, the system will ask whether to finish the SSCC or proceed with the packing from another moveable location.

9.4.5.1. Capture weight

If the ‘Ask weight?’ or ‘Ask weight Sub SSCC?’ option is set to true on the Produmex pick list types user table for the pick list, and there is a scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the weight of the logistic unit can be measured on the connected scale after the logistic unit is finished.

Make sure that conversions between the units of measurements are set up correctly on the Units of Measure - Setup (OUOM) and Weight - Setup (OWGT) SBO standard tables.

  1. The measured weight. The UoM is the UoM defined for the scale. The number of decimals displayed depends on the scale accuracy.
    This field is automatically filled with the weight measured on the connected scale. It is possible to manually overwrite the measured weight.
    If the weight is manually added or the connection to the scale is lost, the value starts flickering in red.
  2. If the scale has a defined zero command, the ‘Zero’ button is displayed.
  3. If the scale has a defined tare command, the ‘Tare’ button is displayed.
  4. The code of the connected scale.
  5. If there are more than one scales defined under the dock/packing line, an additional Switch scale button is displayed on the screen. Tap this button to change the scale.
    On the next screen select the scale from the list. Every scale defined under the dock/packing line is listed. After switching the scale, the screen will use the chosen scale. After proceeding with the flow, and a new weight needs to be captured, the standard logic to choose a scale is used. This means that switching scale only switches the scale for the current weighing.
  6. SSCC number of the logistic unit.
  7. Theoretical weight: The theoretical weight is the sum of the weight of the items on the logistic unit. The item weight can be defined on the Sales tab of the Item Master Data.
  8. In the case of master SSCC’s, an additional Sub SSCC’s weight value is shown. The value is calculated as the sum of the measured weight of the Sub SSCC’s.
9.4.5.2. Enter dimensions

If the Ask weight?/ Ask weight Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, and there is no scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the user has to enter the weight of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished. The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Weight UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

Based on the pick list type settings, the user might have to enter the dimension(s) of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished.

When there are package dimensions defined on the Package Dimensions table, the user can select a predefined dimension instead of entering the length, the width and the height manually. The ’Select a package’ screen opens. On this screen every package dimension that is not cancelled is listed. Select a dimension from the list or tap the Enter dimensions manually button.

When the Enter dimensions manually button is tapped or there are no package dimensions defined, the user has to enter the dimensions manually.

  • If the Ask length?/ Ask length Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the length of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask width?/ Ask width Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the width of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask height?/ Ask height Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the height of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.

The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Length UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

9.4.6. Restarting the flow

The flow can be continued after an abortion. Restart the flow and select the packing location. If there are a moveable location, scan the moveable location as well. Then the system will offer the option to choose from the existing logistic units or to start a new one.

After selecting the logistic unit, scan the SSCC barcode on the logistic unit.

9.4.7. Continue the packing onto an already packed logistic unit

When there are already packed logistic unit(s) for the selected customer or shipping address, the system will offer the option to choose from the existing logistic unit(s) or to start a new one. After selecting a logistic unit, scan the SSCC barcode on it.

9.5. Cash register packing

The Cash register packing flow uses a pick list as an input. In this flow users can perform picking and packing in one step, therefore the input pick list does not have to be picked.

Select packing lineSelect pick listScan barcodeadd_itemsfinish_logistic_unit

9.5.1. Select a packing location

Select a packing line from the list. Every active packing line from the warehouses assigned to the thin client are listed.

If there are already started logistic units on the packing line, the ‘Select a logistic unit to pack on’ screen is displayed. On this screen every packed logistic unit, which is not yet shipped, is listed. The customer name and address is displayed for each logistic unit. To continue packing onto a logistic unit, select the logistic unit and press the right key button. To start a new logistic unit, press the ‘Start new logistic unit’ button.

9.5.2. Select pick list

On the next screen select a pick list. Every pick list that meets the following conditions is displayed:

  • The ‘Use for Cash register packing?’ option enabled for the pick list type.
  • The status is ‘Not Ready’, ‘Partially Ready’, ‘Ready’, ‘Partially Picked’, ‘Picked’ or ‘Partially Packed’.
  • The pick list is assigned to the warehouse of the selected packing line.

9.5.3. Scan barcode

On the next screen the items to pack are listed.

  • Product: The barcode, item code and description of the item to pack.
  • Batch number, Best before date: The batch number, the second batch number and the best before date of the allocated stock. The stock to be packed is allocated from pick locations based on the stock details available on the pick list and based on the FEFO rule. Only stock details that are available on the sales order are enforced.
  • Total: The open quantity on the pick list. Items with no open quantity are not listed.
  • Quantity to pack: The quantity to pack. If the ‘Force user to only scan items?’ option is enabled on the Packing controller, then the quantity to pack can only be added by scanning the barcode, otherwise the quantity can be adjusted with the + - buttons.

The following barcodes can be scanned on this screen:

  • EAN number of the item.
  • GS1 128 barcode. It is possible to pack stock with different details than the allocated stock, except if the stock detail was set on the sales order.
  • Batch number. If the batch number belongs to multiple items, select the item to pack on the opening screen. (Batch with multiple BBD on stock?)
  • Serial number. If the serial number belongs to multiple items, select the item to pack on the opening screen.
  • SSCC number. In the case of a mixed pallet, select the item to pack on the opening screen.

Each scanned barcode increases the quantity by one if valid stock can be found. Over picking is not allowed.

9.5.4. Add items

If there is at least one item where the ‘Quantity to pack’ is not zero, the ‘Add items’ button becomes active. Press this button to pack the ‘Quantity to pack’ amount of the selected items.

If there is a stated logistic unit for the pick list, the system adds the packed items to that logistic unit.
If there is no stated logistic unit for the pick list, then the system checks whether there are started logistic units for the customer. If there are, then the user can continue the packing onto one of those logistic units or create a new one. If there are no started logistic units for the customer, the system automatically creates a new one.
The started logistic unit is displayed on the top right corner of the screen.

If the item to add is managed by serial numbers and not all serial number were scanned, then the serial numbers has to be scanned before packing the item. On the next screen indicate whether you would like to scan the serial numbers one by one or you would like to scan the starting and ending serial number only. For more information about adding the quantity by scanning the serial numbers please see: Screens for entering additional information

9.5.5. Finish logistic unit

If there is at least one product packed onto the logistic unit, the ‘Finish logistic unit’ button becomes active. Press this button to finish the logistic unit.
If configured, the Packing: finished logistic unit event (500) print event is triggered and the SSCC label is printed. After finishing a logistic unit, the system displays the shipping dock where the logistic unit has to be moved.

9.5.5.1. Capture weight

If the ‘Ask weight?’ or ‘Ask weight Sub SSCC?’ option is set to true on the Produmex pick list types user table for the pick list, and there is a scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the weight of the logistic unit can be measured on the connected scale after the logistic unit is finished.

Make sure that conversions between the units of measurements are set up correctly on the Units of Measure - Setup (OUOM) and Weight - Setup (OWGT) SBO standard tables.

  1. The measured weight. The UoM is the UoM defined for the scale. The number of decimals displayed depends on the scale accuracy.
    This field is automatically filled with the weight measured on the connected scale. It is possible to manually overwrite the measured weight.
    If the weight is manually added or the connection to the scale is lost, the value starts flickering in red.
  2. If the scale has a defined zero command, the ‘Zero’ button is displayed.
  3. If the scale has a defined tare command, the ‘Tare’ button is displayed.
  4. The code of the connected scale.
  5. If there are more than one scales defined under the dock/packing line, an additional Switch scale button is displayed on the screen. Tap this button to change the scale.
    On the next screen select the scale from the list. Every scale defined under the dock/packing line is listed. After switching the scale, the screen will use the chosen scale. After proceeding with the flow, and a new weight needs to be captured, the standard logic to choose a scale is used. This means that switching scale only switches the scale for the current weighing.
  6. SSCC number of the logistic unit.
  7. Theoretical weight: The theoretical weight is the sum of the weight of the items on the logistic unit. The item weight can be defined on the Sales tab of the Item Master Data.
  8. In the case of master SSCC’s, an additional Sub SSCC’s weight value is shown. The value is calculated as the sum of the measured weight of the Sub SSCC’s.

9.5.6. Skip items

It is possible that there are goods that cannot be packed. Continue the packing until only products that cannot be packed are listed on the screen.
Tap the Skip all items button to skip every remaining item.

On the next screen confirm that you would like to skip the remaining items.

Confirm skipping

The system proceeds to the Select a reason screen.
Select a reason from the list. Every reason that can be used for picking is listed.

Select a reason

On the next screen define where the skipped items should be moved.

  • To move the items onto an SSCC, scan the SSCC. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location as described below.
  • To create a new SSCC, tap the New SSCC button then identify the destination location as described below. If configured, the 700 - WHS: created LU print event is triggered and the logistic label is printed.
  • Scan the destination location or select it from a list.
    • Tap the Select location button to list every active location from the warehouse.
    • Tap the Select empty location button to list every empty active location from the warehouse.

Please note: If no SSCC is created or selected, the items will be moved without a linked logistic unit.

Select destination

After the destination location is defined, the system removes the locking from the skipped products and updates the pick list.

  • If the total quantity on the pick list line is skipped, the system adds the selected reason to the pick list line and closes it.
  • If the pick list line is partially skipped, the ‘Open’ and ‘Picked’ quantity of the pick list line is updated with the packed quantity. A closed line will be added with the quantity and the details of the skipped product and the selected reason.

After the lockings are removed, the skipped products are moved onto the selected logistic unit or destination location. Then the system returns to the Select moveable location screen where the user can continue the packing.

10. Cycle Count

To check the correctness of the stock that is kept at the administrative level against the stock that is actually present in the warehouse, Produmex offers a cycle counting function. Produmex provides two types of cycle count:

  • ‘Direct cycle count’: This type of count automatically books stock differences as “Goods Issues” (in case of negative differences) or “Goods Receipts” (in case of positive differences) in SAP.
  • ‘Cycle count’: This type of count will not directly book the differences into SAP. First it registers the differences in Produmex according to the type of cycle count (Lost and Found, Registration). Then the booking in SAP can be done in the ‘Processing’ step.

‘Cycle count’ types:

  • Lost and Found: The differences will be booked during the count therefore the new stock will be displayed in the inventory without processing. To balance the inventory, the system will add the inverse of the stock difference to the ‘Lost and Found’ location.
  • Registration: The differences will be stored in a table and the stock on the counted location will remain the same until the count is processed.

Please note that differences for serial numbers will always use type 'Registration', regardless of the selected type in the controller.

10.1. Configurations

Before starting the cycle count, adjust the following settings:

10.1.1. Quality status

The quality status of the found stock can be the following:

  1. The default quality status of the location.
    • If the location has a default quality status set.
  2. The quality status of the stock that has the exact same details (Location, SSCC, Batch, BBD).
    • If the counted location has no default quality status set and there is only one quality status found for the stock with the same details.
  3. The default quality status set for cycle counting on the Defaults tab of the Organizational Structure.
    • If the counted location has no default quality status set and multiple quality status found for the stock with the same details or there is no stock with the same details.

When quantity is reduced and there are two or more statuses found for the same stock details, the system will also replace them with the default “Quality status cycle counting”. Additional items that are counted at a certain location where existing stock row is found, will also get the default “Quality status cycle counting”.

Examples:
Default quality status: BLOCKED

Scenario 1:
Location default quality status: -
On location: 1 piece with quality status RELEASED
Counting: 2 pieces
Result: The additional piece will get quality status RELEASED

Scenario 2:
Location default quality status: -
On location: 1 piece with quality status RELEASED and 1 piece with quality status REJECTED
Counting: 3 pieces
Result: All 3 pieces will get quality status BLOCKED

Scenario 3:
Location default quality status: -
On location: 2 piece with quality status RELEASED and 2 piece with quality status REJECTED
Counting: 3 pieces
Result: All 3 pieces will get quality status BLOCKED

Scenario 4:
Location default quality status: -
On location: 0 pieces
Counting: 2 pieces
Result: The 2 pieces will get quality status BLOCKED

Scenario 5:
Location default quality status: SUQ
On location: 0 pieces
Counting: 3 pieces
Result: The 3 pieces will get quality status SUQ

10.1.2. Cycle Count Controller

Adjust cycle count settings for the company. For further information about the cycle count controller see:
5.1.3.9. Cycle count controller

10.1.3. Location

Adjust cycle count settings for a location. For further information about the cycle count settings see:
5.2.6.2 Cycle count

10.1.4. Lost and Found

When using the cycle count type ‘LostAndFound’, extra configuration needs to be done:
Create a non pick BIN location where the stock differences will be booked. On the warehouse definition select this location as Location ‘Lost and Found’ from a dropdown menu.

10.1.5. Cycle count during other operations

Set the configurations for the cycle count during other operations. For further information see:
3.2.3.17. Produmex cycle count – Other operations filter (PMX_COOF)

10.1.6. Pick List Controller

Set if the system allows cycle count on alternate picking. For further information see:
5.1.3.44. Picklist controller

10.1.7. Force serial numbers during cycle count

When the ‘Force serial numbers during cycle count’ option is enabled for items with PMX serial numbers and enabled track location, then during the ‘Cycle count’ process, the quantity must be entered by scanning the serial numbers. This option can be enabled at the item’s Produmex Inventory tab.

10.2. Direct Cycle Count

Count locationIdentify locationScan SSCCIdentify productEnter batch dataAdd quantityAdjust logistic unitScan SSCCSelect itemAdjust quantityCount items on locationIdentify locationIdentify productScan SSCCEnter batch dataAdd quantity

Select the “Direct cycle counting” function on the handheld terminal.

Select the cycle count task:

  • Count location: count all the items on this location.
  • Adjust logistic unit: count all the items on the selected logistic unit.
  • Count items on location: count only a certain product on the location.

10.2.1. Count location

Identify location

Identify the location for which cycle counting has to be done.

Scan SSCC

Identify the logistic unit on which the item is stored or to select “No SSCC” in case the item is not stored on an existing logistic unit.

Stop process

To stop the process, press the ‘Stop’ button. After pressing the button, the system will ask for confirmation.

  • Press ‘No’ to proceed with the cycle count.
  • Press ‘Yes’ to finish the cycle count. After pressing ‘Yes’, the differences will be shown if configured. If no item was counted during the cycle count, the location will be booked as an empty location.
Identify product

Scan or select an item. It is possible to scan the GTIN on the product or the GS1/EAN128 barcode on the logistic unit (in case of a mono pallet). When selecting a product manually, the complete item list will open, as it is always possible that any item which has not been registered administratively at that location, may be present there.

Enter batch data

If there is no GS1/EAN128 product barcode on the logistic unit, the system will ask to enter additional information about the product manually, e.g. the batch number, second batch number, and/or the best before date. If there is a GS1/EAN128 barcode on the logistic unit, the system would have recorded this information directly.

Add quantity

Enter the quantity.

Add new item or finish process

After the confirmation of the quantity, the system asks whether to count an additional item at that location. When pressing ‘Yes’, the counting process will proceed with a new item. When pressing ‘No’, the system calculates if there is a difference between the quantity of items counted on the location and the registered quantity in the inventory report.

When there is no difference, the system will display an empty ‘Difference stock’ screen.

When there is a difference, the following will be shown on the screen:

  • In the case the difference is positive, the handheld will show a blue arrow pointing upward. (Items with differing batch data will be counted as a new item as well.)
  • In the case the counted item is new for this location, the handheld will show a green arrow pointing upwards to the right.
  • In the case the difference is negative (i.e. less stock at the location than registered in inventory), the handheld will show a red arrow pointing downwards to the right and add a minus sign before the quantity.

Press the right arrow button to confirm the differences. After that, the system books positive differences as “Goods Receipt” and negative differences as “Goods Issue”. The pricelist defined on the Cycle count controller is used on these documents.

Cancel cycle count

To cancel the process, press the left arrow button. The system will check whether there are already entered stock. If there are, the system will ask for confirmation.

  • When clicking ‘Yes’, the list of counted stock will be cleared, and no bookings will be done. This can be considered a ‘cancellation’ of the counted stock.
  • When clicking ‘No’ the cycle count process can be continued.

10.2.2. Adjust logistic unit

Scan SSCC

Identify the SSCC. After identifying the SSCC, the system will display all the items stored on the SSCC.

Select item

Select an item from the list.

Adjust quantity

Adjust the quantity of the selected item. If the quantity in stock matches with the quantity in the inventory, the system goes back to the list of the items on the SSCC. If the quantity in stock does not match with the quantity in the inventory, the system updates the quantity in the inventory. After the system update, the counting can be continued on another SSCC.

10.2.3. Count items on location

Identify location

Identify the location for which cycle counting has to be done.

Identify product

Select the item to count on the location. It is possible to scan the GTIN on the product or the GS1/EAN128 barcode on the logistic unit (in case of a mono pallet). When selecting a product manually, the complete item list will open, as it is always possible that any item which has not been registered administratively at that location, may be present there.

Empty location

If the location is empty, press on the ‘Location is empty’ button. After pressing the button, the system will ask for confirmation whether the location is empty or not. When pressing the ‘Yes’ button, the system books this location as an empty location and the counting can be continued on another location. Scan an SSCC. If there is no SSCC present, press the ‘No SSCC’ button.

Enter batch data

If there is no GS1/EAN128 product barcode on the logistic unit, the system will ask to enter additional information about the product manually, e.g. the batch number, second batch number, and/or the best before date. If there is a GS1/EAN128 barcode on the logistic unit, the system would have recorded this information directly.

Adjust quantity

Enter the quantity.

Add new item or finish process

After the confirmation of the quantity, the system asks whether to count an additional item at that location. When pressing ‘Yes’, the counting process will proceed with a new item. When pressing ‘No’, the system calculates if there is a difference between the quantity of items counted on the location and the registered quantity in the inventory report.

When there is no difference, the system will display an empty ‘Difference stock’ screen.

When there is a difference, the following will be shown on the screen:

  • In the case the difference is positive, the handheld will show a blue arrow pointing upward. (Items with differing batch data will be counted as a new item as well.)
  • In the case the counted item is new for this location, the handheld will show a green arrow pointing upwards to the right.
  • In the case the difference is negative (i.e. less stock at the location than registered in inventory), the handheld will show a red arrow pointing downwards to the right and add a minus sign before the quantity.

Press the right arrow button to confirm the differences. After that, the system books positive differences as “Goods Receipt” and negative differences as “Goods Issue”. The pricelist defined on the Cycle count controller is used on these documents.

Cancel cycle count

To cancel the process, press the left arrow button. The system will check whether there are already entered stock. If there are, the system will ask for confirmation.

  • When clicking ‘Yes’, the list of counted stock will be cleared, and no bookings will be done. This can be considered a ‘cancellation’ of the counted stock.
  • When clicking ‘No’ the cycle count process can be continued.

10.3. Cycle count

Without taskWith taskCount everythingCount SSCCCount items on locationScan SSCCScan itemEnter batch dataAdd quantityIdentify itemScan itemEnter batch dataAdd quantityProcess cycle count

Select the “Cycle counting” function on the handheld terminal.
Select the cycle count task:

  • With task: When selecting this task, only locations with the option ‘Location needs to be counted now’ set to true are allowed.
  • Without task: When selecting this task, all locations with the option ‘Allow to be counted during cycle count’ set to true are allowed.

10.3.1. Cycle count with task

Office
Tasks can be made for the cycle counting process. Tasks allow users to plan the cycle counting.

The settings on this screen can be used to limit the locations that will need to be counted. After pressing the ‘Update’ button, it will set the property ‘Needs to be counted now’ on the selected location(s) to true.

Pick locations, non-pick locations, reception dock, shipping dock, production lines
Select the type of locations to perform the actions on.

Only when cycle count requirements are met
When this setting is set to true, the cycle count settings (like number of days, number of operations, …) on location and cycle count controller are checked. Only locations where these requirements are met will be used to perform the actions.

Warehouse
Select the warehouse. If no warehouse is selected all warehouses are used.

Zone
After selecting a warehouse, all zones in this warehouse will be listed here. Select a zone to only use the locations in this zone. If no zone is selected, all zones are used.

Location from… to
Select location(s) which needs to be counted.

Lock location for user
Select a user to lock the locations for. If no user is selected, the location(s) will not be locked. When a user is selected, the locations that are found using the entered selection criteria will be locked for this user. This means stock on these locations cannot be used. Only the selected user can perform the cycle counting task on the handheld device. This option can be used to divide the cycle counting task for users.

Item group
Select an item group. The property ‘Needs to be counted’ will be set to true on locations where the items from the group are stored.

Item from… to
Select item(s). The property ‘Needs to be counted’ will be set to true on locations where the selected item(s) are stored.

Remove count task from selected locations
If this is set to true, the property ‘Needs to be counted’ on location will be set to false.

Remove lock from selected locations
Remove the lock on the selected locations.

Shopfloor

All screens regarding the cycle count will have the prefix ‘Cycle count:‘ on the screen title. This is done because when the user needs to perform cycle count during other operations, it is visually clear that he is performing a cycle count.

Select the option ‘Cycle count’ and then ‘With task’.

If there are no locations which needs to be counted, the system will display the message ‘No more zones to count’.
If there are locations which needs to be counted, the system will display the list of zones where those location(s) are located. Select a zone.

After selecting a zone, select a location from the list. Only locations that need to be counted and have no locking, or are locked for the current user, are displayed in the list.
After the user has selected the location, this location will be locked for this user. No other user will see this location in the list of locations to be counted.

When the cycle count type is ‘Registration’, the system will check if there are open registrations. When there are open registrations, the system asks whether to remove those registrations. Press ‘Yes’ for clearing the previous registrations. In this case only new registrations will be used. Press ‘No’ for keeping the previous registrations. In this case, new registrations will be added to the already existing registrations.

Select a task:

  • Count everything: count all the items on this location.
  • Count SSCC’s: count all full logistic units on the location.

Note: Full logistic units in the system are SSCC’s where no stock has been removed yet.

10.3.1.1. Count everything
Scan SSCC

Scan the SSCC or press the ‘No SSCC’ button if there is no SSCC present.

To stop the process, press the ‘Stop’ button.

Empty location
If the location is empty press the ‘Location is empty’ button. After pressing the button, the system will ask whether the location is empty. Press the ‘Yes’ button to confirm. Then the system will display the list of differences in stock if configured. When proceeding, the differences will be registered according to the type of cycle count (Lost and Found, Registration).

Scan item

Scan the product barcode. When no barcode is present, press the ‘Select product’ button and select it from a list. This list contains all the products.

Enter batch data

If there is no GS1/EAN128 product barcode on the logistic unit, the system will ask to enter additional information about the product manually, e.g. the batch number, second batch number, and/or the best before date (if applicable). If there is a GS1/EAN128 barcode on the logistic unit, the system would have recorded this information directly. After the batch information has been entered, the system will check if the combination of batch/BBD is known in the system. If this is not the case, confirm that the batch/BBD is not known.

Add quantity

Enter the quantity. For more information about how to enter the quantity please see: Screens for entering additional information.

When the item is managed by 'On every transaction' SAP serial numbers and the track location option is enabled, the quantity must be defined by scanning the serial numbers.

When the item is managed by ’On release only’ SAP serial numbers and the track location option is enabled, the quantity must be entered manually. When there is a negative difference and there are existing serial numbers on the location, the missing serial numbers can be selected during processing the count.

When the item has PMX serial numbers and track location enabled, the quantity can be defined by scanning the serial numbers or entering the quantity. If the 'Force serial numbers during cycle count' option is enabled for the item, then the quantity can only be added by scanning the serial numbers.

When the item has serial numbers but the track location option is not enabled, the quantity can only be defined by entering it manually. However Produmex does not support these items in the ‘Process’ step of the cycle count.

Add new item or finish the process

After entering the quantity, proceed with the next item on the location. The system will display the ‘Cycle count: Scan an SSCC’ screen, however the ‘Location is empty’ button will not be displayed.

After counting all the items on the location, press the ‘Stop’ button.
When pressing the ‘Stop’ button, a confirmation to stop the cycle count is asked.

  • Press ‘No’ to proceed with other items on the location.
  • Press ‘Yes’ to finish the cycle count. After pressing the button, the differences will be shown if configured. When proceeding, the differences will be registered according to the type of cycle count (Lost and Found, Registration).
Cancel cycle count

To cancel the process, press the left arrow button. The system will check whether there are already entered stock. If there are, the system will ask for confirmation.

  • When clicking ‘Yes’, the list of counted stock will be cleared, and no bookings will be done. This can be considered a ‘cancellation’ of the counted stock.
  • When clicking ‘No’ the cycle count process can be continued.
10.3.1.2. Count SSCC's

Enter the number of full SSCC’s.

If the number of the entered SSCC’s does not correspond to the number of full SSCC’s in the system, the system requires to perform the ‘Count everything’ cycle count task.

If the number of entered SSCC’s corresponds to the number of full SSCC’s in the system, the system will ask to enter the data for the partial SSCC’s.

When there are partial SSCC’s on the location, proceed by scanning the SSCC on the partial logistic unit or press the ‘No SSCC’ button. Then the ‘Count everything’ cycle count task will be performed for those logistic units.

When there are no partial SSCC’s, press the ‘Location has no partial SSCC’s’ button. Then the system will ask whether there are partial SSCC’s on the location. Confirm this action.

10.3.2. Cycle count no task

Scan or select a location.
After identifying the location, select a task:

  • Count everything: count all the items on this location.
  • Count SSCC’s: count all full logistic units on the location.
  • Count items on location: count only a certain product on the location.

10.3.2.1. Count everything
Scan SSCC

Scan the SSCC or press the ‘No SSCC’ button if there is no SSCC present.

To stop the process, press the ‘Stop’ button.

Empty location
If the location is empty press the ‘Location is empty’ button. After pressing the button, the system will ask whether the location is empty. Press the ‘Yes’ button to confirm. Then the system will display the list of differences in stock if configured. When proceeding, the differences will be registered according to the type of cycle count (Lost and Found, Registration).

Scan item

Scan the product barcode. When no barcode is present, press the ‘Select product’ button and select it from a list. This list contains all the products.

Enter batch data

If there is no GS1/EAN128 product barcode on the logistic unit, the system will ask to enter additional information about the product manually, e.g. the batch number, second batch number, and/or the best before date (if applicable). If there is a GS1/EAN128 barcode on the logistic unit, the system would have recorded this information directly. After the batch information has been entered, the system will check if the combination of batch/BBD is known in the system. If this is not the case, confirm that the batch/BBD is not known.

Add quantity

Enter the quantity. For more information about how to enter the quantity please see: Screens for entering additional information.

When the item is managed by 'On every transaction' SAP serial numbers and the track location option is enabled, the quantity must be defined by scanning the serial numbers.

When the item is managed by ’On release only’ SAP serial numbers and the track location option is enabled, the quantity must be entered manually. When there is a negative difference and there are existing serial numbers on the location, the missing serial numbers can be selected during processing the count.

When the item has PMX serial numbers and track location enabled, the quantity can be defined by scanning the serial numbers or entering the quantity. If the 'Force serial numbers during cycle count' option is enabled for the item, then the quantity can only be added by scanning the serial numbers.

When the item has serial numbers but the track location option is not enabled, the quantity can only be defined by entering it manually. However Produmex does not support these items in the ‘Process’ step of the cycle count.

Add new item or finish the process

After entering the quantity, proceed with the next item on the location. The system will display the ‘Cycle count: Scan an SSCC’ screen, however the ‘Location is empty’ button will not be displayed.

After counting all the items on the location, press the ‘Stop’ button.
When pressing the ‘Stop’ button, a confirmation to stop the cycle count is asked.

  • Press ‘No’ to proceed with other items on the location.
  • Press ‘Yes’ to finish the cycle count. After pressing the button, the differences will be shown if configured. When proceeding, the differences will be registered according to the type of cycle count (Lost and Found, Registration).
Cancel cycle count

To cancel the process, press the left arrow button. The system will check whether there are already entered stock. If there are, the system will ask for confirmation.

  • When clicking ‘Yes’, the list of counted stock will be cleared, and no bookings will be done. This can be considered a ‘cancellation’ of the counted stock.
  • When clicking ‘No’ the cycle count process can be continued.
10.3.2.2. Count SSCC

Enter the number of full SSCC’s.

If the number of the entered SSCC’s does not correspond to the number of full SSCC’s in the system, the system requires to perform the ‘Count everything’ cycle count task.

If the number of entered SSCC’s corresponds to the number of full SSCC’s in the system, the system will ask to enter the data for the partial SSCC’s.

When there are partial SSCC’s on the location, proceed by scanning the SSCC on the partial logistic unit or press the ‘No SSCC’ button. Then the ‘Count everything’ cycle count task will be performed for those logistic units.

When there are no partial SSCC’s, press the ‘Location has no partial SSCC’s’ button. Then the system will ask whether there are partial SSCC’s on the location. Confirm this action.

10.3.2.3. Count items on location
Identify the product

Scan the product. When no barcode is present, press the ‘Select product’ button and select it from a list. This list contains all the products.

Empty location
If the location is empty press the ‘Location is empty’ button. After pressing the button, the system will ask whether the location is empty. Press the ‘Yes’ button to confirm. Then the system will display the list of differences in stock if configured. When proceeding, the differences will be registered according to the type of cycle count (Lost and Found, Registration).

Scan SSCC

Scan the SSCC the item is on. If there is no SSCC present press the ‘No SSCC’ button.

Enter batch data

If there is no GS1/EAN128 product barcode on the logistic unit, the system will ask to enter additional information about the product manually, e.g. the batch number, second batch number, and/or the best before date (if applicable). If there is a GS1/EAN128 barcode on the logistic unit, the system would have recorded this information directly. After the batch information has been entered, the system will check if the combination of batch/BBD is known in the system. If this is not the case, confirm that the batch/BBD is not known.

Add quantity

Enter the quantity. For more information about how to enter the quantity please see: Screens for entering additional information.

When the item is managed by 'On every transaction' SAP serial numbers and the track location option is enabled, the quantity must be defined by scanning the serial numbers.

When the item is managed by ’On release only’ SAP serial numbers and the track location option is enabled, the quantity must be entered manually. When there is a negative difference and there are existing serial numbers on the location, the missing serial numbers can be selected during processing the count.

When the item has PMX serial numbers and track location enabled, the quantity can be defined by scanning the serial numbers or entering the quantity. If the 'Force serial numbers during cycle count' option is enabled for the item, then the quantity can only be added by scanning the serial numbers.

When the item has serial numbers but the track location option is not enabled, the quantity can only be defined by entering it manually. However Produmex does not support these items in the ‘Process’ step of the cycle count.

Finish process

After entering the quantity, proceed with the next logistic unit on the location. The system will display the ‘Cycle count: Scan an SSCC’ screen, however the ‘Location is empty’ button will not be displayed.

After counting the total stock for the item on the location, press the ‘Stop’ button.
When pressing the ‘Stop’ button, a confirmation to stop the cycle count is asked.

  • Press ‘No’ to proceed with other logistic units on the location.
  • Press ‘Yes’ to finish the cycle count. After pressing the button, the differences will be shown if configured. When proceeding, the differences will be registered according to the type of cycle count (Lost and Found, Registration).
Cancel cycle count

To cancel the process, press the left arrow button. The system will check whether there are already entered stock. If there are, the system will ask for confirmation.

  • When clicking ‘Yes’, the list of counted stock will be cleared, and no bookings will be done. This can be considered a ‘cancellation’ of the counted stock.
  • When clicking ‘No’ the cycle count process can be continued.

10.3.3. Cycle count during other operations

When the cycle counting needs to be done during other operations, the system will display the message ‘This location needs to be counted’. After pressing the ‘Ok’ button, a ‘Cycle count’ type process can be started.

Based on the cycle count controller configurations, the system might allow to skip the count. When the skipping is allowed, and extra ‘Skip count’ button will appear. For skipping the count, select the ‘Skip count’ button or press the left arrow button.
If configured, the system displays a list of reasons for the skipping. Select a reason.

When the skipping is not allowed, the normal ‘Cycle count’ process will be performed. When pressing the left arrow button, the system will display a warning message that the count cannot be skipped.

10.4. Process

In case of the ‘Cycle count’ flow, for processing the counted data open the ‘Process’ window from the Produmex menu. This window displays all the differences counted according the cycle count type.

Warehouse
The warehouse where the cycle count was performed.
Remarks
Remarks to be added to the issue and/or receipt.
Posting date
The posting date of the issue and/or receipt.
G/L Account receipt/issue
The G/L account to use for the issues and/or receipts. (This only needs to be set when using Perpetual Inventory and if this is set on the controller)

10.4.1. Process LostAndFound

If there are multiple rows in the list, selected rows can be removed by pressing the ‘Delete’ button. This deletes the entries from the list to process but the data is not deleted from the database. Deleted rows will appear again after the list is refreshed.

It is possible to process the counted difference in multiple steps. Adjust the quantity on the grid before processing the row. Example: The quantity on the row is 64. If you would like to process only 20, change the quantity to 20. When processing the row, only 20 is processed, and the remaining 44 can be processed later.

The item cost will be the item cost for the given warehouse (OITW.AvgPrice) when the following verifies:

  • The Item Groups Valuation Method is ‘Moving Average’ (OADM.InvntSystm = ‘A’) for the company
  • The Manage Item Cost per Warehouse option is enabled (OADM.PriceSys = ‘Y’) for the company

In other cases this will be the item cost (OITM.AvgPrice).

A negative quantity means that there is not enough stock in the system. When processing this, a goods receipt will be booked to add stock to the system. A positive quantity means that there is too much stock in the system. A goods issue will be booked to correct this.

After pressing the ‘Update’ button, the selected rows in the grid will be processed. After processing, the system will inform the user that the processing has been done. After processing, the list will be refreshed.

Please note that goods issues can only be performed if the stock is not currently locked. If this is the case, the locking should be removed before processing the cycle count.

Recommendation when using cycle count type ‘LostAndFound’:
If cycle counting during other operations is used, or cycle counting is performed while other processes (Picking, production, …) still take place, it is recommended to regularly process the counted locations.

For example:
In the system there is no stock in the system of ProductA. Location A1 is counted, and 10 pieces of ProductA are found. On the LostAndFound location, the stock of ProductA is -10, and on location A1 there will be 10 pieces. The sum of that stock is 0, and that corresponds to the stock available in SAP.

Because there is now 10 pieces of ProductA on location A1, it is possible to make a pick list for this stock, and pick the items. But when the user will try to ship the items, an error will occur, because the stock is not known in SAP.

So the processing of the cycle count needs to be done first. A goods receipt of 10 pieces of ProductA will be booked, so the stock in SAP will contain 10 pieces of ProductA. Now the shipping of the pick list can be performed.

10.4.2. Process Registration

If there are multiple rows in the list, selected rows can be removed by pressing the ‘Delete’ button. This deletes the entries from the list to process but the data is not deleted from the database. Deleted rows will appear again after the list is refreshed.

It is possible to process less than the counted difference. For example the counted difference is -32. The quantity can be changed to -20. When processing the row, only 20 is processed and the remaining 12 will not reappear on the list. It is not possible to change the quantity to process to -34.

The item cost will be the item cost for the given warehouse (OITW.AvgPrice) when the following verifies:

  • The Item Groups Valuation Method is ‘Moving Average’ (OADM.InvntSystm = ‘A’) for the company
  • The Manage Item Cost per Warehouse option is enabled (OADM.PriceSys = ‘Y’) for the company

In other cases this will be the item cost (OITM.AvgPrice).

Contrary to the cycle count type ‘LostAndFound’, the processing of the positive and negative quantity is done oppositely.
A positive quantity means that there is not enough stock in the system. When processing this, a goods receipt will be booked to add stock to the system. A negative quantity means that there is too much stock in the system. A goods issue will be booked to correct this.

After pressing the ‘Update’ button, all rows in the grid will be processed. After processing, the system will inform the user that the processing has been done. After processing, the list will be refreshed. If there were deleted rows, they will appear again in the list.

Note: Goods issues can only be performed if the stock is not currently locked. If this is the case, the locking should be removed before processing the cycle count.

10.4.3. Adjust price

When the ‘Manually set price on processing the count‘ option is enabled on the Cycle Count Controller, the price of the items can be adjusted. Four additional columns are displayed on the screen:

  • Enter new price: Add the new price for the item to this field. By default it is filled with the value from the ‘Item Cost’ field. The price of a catch weight item cannot be adjusted on this field.
  • Price/weight: The price per weight ratio of the catch weight items. It is calculated based on: ((Total pieces x item cost)/Default weight ratio)
  • Enter new price/weight: Add a new price per weight ratio for the catch weight item on this field to adjust the price.
  • Total new price: the new total cost by item.
    • For normal items the new total price will be calculated based on: (Number of pieces x New price)
    • For catch weight items the new total price will be calculated based on: (Weight x New price/weight)

After processing the cycle count, the value from the ‘Total new price’ column will be added to the goods receipt/ goods issue document.

10.5. Serial Numbers

On the Produmex > Cycle count menu there is an option to list and remove missing serial numbers. Serial Numbers

Type
Displays the filtering conditions for the items in the list. Select the serial number type on the combo box. The following items can be listed:

  • items managed by PMX serial number with track location, but the linked LUID is no longer in stock
  • items managed by SAP serial number with track location, but the linked LUID is no longer in stock
  • items managed by PMX serial number without track location, but the batch is not in stock

Item
Filter the list by selecting an item. Only items having PMX serial numbers or SAP serial numbers with track location can be selected.

To remove serial numbers, select their line and click on the ‘Remove’ button.

11. Container Management

11.1. Configuration

11.1.1. Container management controller

Adjust the settings for container management in the ’Container management controller’. For more information about the controller see: 5.1.3.10. Container management controller

11.2. Office

11.2.1. Open documents report

To see the list of open containers, open the ‘Open document report’.
Select ‘Container’ as the document type. The list of open containers will be displayed. A container can be closed by selecting the container(s) and clicking the ‘Close document’ button.
It is possible to filter the list based on the items in the document. Add an item to the ‘Item’ field.

11.2.2. Container management form

The Container Management form can be accessed by two paths:

  • Produmex > Sales > Container management
    The document type will be ‘Sales’ by default.
  • Produmex > Purchase > Container management
    The document type will be ‘Purchase’ by default.

Number
This is the key used to uniquely identify the container.

Container code
The code of the container.

Container description
The description of the container.

Expedition number
The number of the expedition. This value is for information only.

Business partner
The CardCode and the name of the Business partner. On ‘Sales’ type containers only customers, and on ‘Purchase’ type containers only vendors can be selected. After a business partner has been selected, only documents linked to that partner can be added.
On ‘Route’ type containers no business partner can be selected.

Bill of lading number
The number of the Bill of Lading document. This value is for information only.

Proof of delivery reference
Reference for the proof of delivery. This value is for information only.

Maximum volume (weight, price)
The maximum volume (weight, price) a container can have. If no check on volume (weight, price) needs to be done, this can be set to 0 (zero). The uom for the volume (weight) can be selected. The price is the local currency defined in SAP.

Total volume (weight, price)
This is the total volume (weight, price) of the document lines linked to the container. The color this control gets, is based on the settings on the Container management controller.

Total open volume (weight, price)
This is the total open volume (weight, price) of the document lines linked to the container. The color this control gets, is based on the settings on the Container management controller.

# packages
The number of the packages. This value is for information only.

Voyage (in days)
The length of the voyage in days. When the value in this field is 0, the user can modify the value in the ‘Estimated date of arrival’ field.

Estimated date of departure
The estimated date of departure.

ETA port
The estimated time of arrival at the destination port. The field is autofilled based on the following calculation: ‘Estimated date of departure’ and the ‘Lead Time’ linked to the selected ‘Delivery type’ of the ‘Port of destination’.
Note that this field is not autofilled if the value of Voyage (in days) is 0.

Estimated date of arrival
The estimated date of arrival at the warehouse. The default value is calculated based on the ‘ETA port’ field and the ‘Lead Time In Days Between Port And Warehouse’ set in the Container management controller. When the value in the ‘Voyage(in days)’ field is zero, this field can be modified by the user.

Actual arrival date to port
The actual date of the arrival to the port.

Actual delivery date
The actual date of the delivery.

Emptied at
The date when the container was emptied.

Actual dehire date
The actual date when the container was dehired.

Type
The type of the container. Possible values can be ‘Purchase’, ‘Sales’ or ‘Route’. Once a line has been added to the container, the type of container cannot be changed anymore.

Container status
The status a container can have. Possible values can be ‘Open’, ‘In transit’, ‘Delivered’ or ‘Closed’.

  • Open: All data can be changed except number.
  • In transit: The container is in transit.
  • Delivered: The container is delivered.

When the container status is ‘In transit’ or ‘Delivered’, only the following data can be changed:

  • Container description
  • Bill of lading number
  • Proof of delivery reference
  • Voyage(in days)
  • Estimated date of arrival
  • Actual arrival date to port
  • Actual delivery date
  • Emptied at
  • Actual dehire date
  • Container shipping status
  • Incident type

Closed: The container is closed. No more data can be changed.

Container shipping status
The shipping status of the container.

Shipping type
The shipping type of the container. This value is for information only.

Incident type
The type of the incident. Every Reason that can be used for containers can be selected.

Port of origin
The port of origin. Every port defined in the (PMX_PORT) UDT can be selected.

Port of destination
The port of destination. Every port defined in the (PMX_PORT) UDT can be selected.

Delivery type
The type of the delivery. The possible values are: Normal/ Express.

Delete line
Select one or more lines, and click button ‘Delete line’ to delete the lines from the container.

Close document
Click button ‘Close document’ to close the container.

Cancel
Click on the button to close the screen.

Add lines/ Document
Document lines can be linked to a container.

In case of ‘Sales’ and ‘Purchase’ type of containers, click on the ‘Add lines’ button. According to the type of container, purchase orders or sales orders will be listed.

After a business partner has been added to a container, only documents linked to that selected business partner can be added.

Only open document lines not linked to an open container will be added.
It is possible to ship one order line in multiple containers. After adding the order line to the first container, adjust the quantity on the ‘Open quantity’ field on the grid. When adding this order line to the next container, the remaining quantity will be default and also the maximum quantity that can be added.
Select the order(s) and click on ‘Ok’.

In case of ‘Route’ type of containers, click in the ‘Document’ field and press tab. Select the route(s) and click on ‘Choose’ to add them to the container. Container lines of a container of type ‘Route’ are linked to the complete route. A document (line) can only be added to one open container.

11.2.3. Route

When a route is linked to a container, an extra control is shown on the route planning screen. The code of the container is shown. The arrow on the left can be clicked to open the container this route is linked to. Next to the container code are the values for volume, weight and price. If no maximum value is set, the total amount is shown with the corresponding uom. In case a maximum value is set, the total amount and maximum amount is shown. Also the percentage is indicated. The colors are based on the settings in the Container management controller.

11.3. Shopfloor

11.3.1. Reception

In the reception flow an option for the container has been added.
During the reception flow, select the option ‘Container’. A list of containers of type ‘Purchase’ and with status ‘In transit’ will be shown. After selecting the container, the normal receiving process can be continued. Only open items in the container will be received.
When no container is found, the system will display a ‘There was no container found’ message.

When the ‘Auto close container when delivered? (Y/N)’ option is set to true, the container will be closed after every line have been received. When this option is not flagged, the status of the container will be changed to ‘Delivered’ after the reception.

12. Move Guide

Moves can be used to transfer stock within or between warehouses. Produmex offers several specialized flows for the different scenarios in stock relocation:

  • ‘Ad hoc movement’: to move stock within or between PMX managed warehouses without a move order created in the office environment
  • ‘Move order’: to move stock within or between PMX managed warehouses based on move orders created in the office environment
  • ‘Replenish pick locations’: to move stock based on system generated replenishment orders
  • ‘Consolidated move’: to execute ad hoc moves in a group within a PMX warehouse
  • ‘Move from WA location’: to move stock from a warehouse automation location
  • ‘Receive from WHS’: to move stock from a warehouse not managed by PMX to a PMX warehouse

To execute the flows on the shopfloor follow the next path on the handheld terminal: Logistic > Move.

Default location calculation

When the location suggestion is enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the first suggested location calculated based on the logic described in Location suggestions.

When the location suggestion is not enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the standard location set for the given warehouse on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data of the item. If the items to move have different standard location set for the warehouse, no default location is displayed.

12.1. Ad hoc moves
12.2. Move orders
12.3. Replenishment
12.4. Consolidated move
12.5. Receive from WHS flow
12.6. Move from WA location

View move documents
When a movement has been carried out on the shopfloor, it is also registered administratively in the Produmex Office module where it can be consulted. To see the movements, open the ’Move’ screen via the following path: Produmex > Inventory > Move. Move screen

12.1. Ad hoc moves

Ad-hoc moves are used to move stock without a move order. The movement can be performed both in the office environment and on the shopfloor.

12.1.1. Configuration

Set the default warehouses
Set default warehouses for the thin client. For more information about thin client settings see: 5.2.10. Thin client settings

12.1.1.2. Move controller
Adjust the settings for the ad hoc moves in the move controller. For more information about the move controller see: 5.1.3.58. Move controller

12.1.2. Ad-hoc movements in the office

Select stock line(s) from the Inventory Report. Click on the ’Move’ button and select the ’Perform move’ option from the dropdown menu.

On the ‘Perform Move’ window, select a destination location from the dropdown menu. Every active location of the company can be selected./ Both local moves and warehouse transfers can be performed. Add the quantity. By default the quantity is the quantity of the stock line. The entered quantity cannot exceed the quantity of the stock in the line. Press the ‘Execute’ button to perform the move.

Please note: Only authorized users can perform ad-hoc moves in the office. For more information please see: Authorizations

12.1.3. Ad-hoc movements on the shopfloor

To initiate the flow, follow the next path: Logistic > Move > Ad hoc movement

Select move typeSelect warehouseSelect move taskFull logistic unitScan an SSCCIdentify destination locationPartial logistic unitIdentify source locationScan an SSCCIdentify productEnter quantityIdentify destination location/SSCCMultiple logistic unitsScan the SSCC’sScan the destination location or GS1 labelBulk moveIdentify pick locationIdentify destination locationEnter quantity

When there is only one or no default warehouse set for the thin client, only local moves are allowed. When there are more than one default warehouses set for the thin client, warehouse transfers can be executed as well between the default warehouses.

In order to be able perform ad hoc moves into a non-Produmex managed warehouse, set up the warehouse in the following way:

  1. On the Warehouse – Setup window set the ’Is managed by Produmex?’ user defined field to ’False’.
  2. On the Organizational Structure create a Warehouse type location for the given warehouse and select the SBO warehouse as the ’Warehouse’.
  3. Create a Dock type location under the warehouse and enable the ’Active’, ’Loading’ and ’Unloading’ checkboxes.

Select move type

Select the move type. To move stock within the warehouse, press ‘Local move’. To move stock between warehouses, press ‘Warehouse transfer’.

Select warehouse

When executing a warehouse transfer, select the destination warehouse. Only the default warehouses set for the thin client can be selected.

Select move task
12.1.3.1. Full logistic unit

Press the ’Full logistic unit’ button to move a full logistic unit.

Scan an SSCC

Scan the SSCC on the logistic unit to move.

Identify destination location

Scan the destination location or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select other location’ button. In case of a warehouse transfer, only locations from the selected warehouse can be scanned or selected.

When the location suggestion is enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the first suggested location calculated based on the logic described in Location suggestions.

When the location suggestion is not enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the standard location set for the given warehouse on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data of the item. If the items to move have different standard location set for the warehouse, no default location is displayed.

When the location suggestion is not enabled, an additional ‘Select empty location’ button will be displayed. To execute the move to an empty location, press this button and select a location from the list.

In case of a warehouse transfer, the ‘Warehouse: move has been added (701)’ print event will be triggered after the destination location had been selected, if the print event is defined.

Logistic unit/ items are moved

After scanning or selecting the new destination location, the ad-hoc movement is registered and the system displays the message: Logistic unit/Items are moved. The movement is booked as a ‘Move’ in case of local moves, or as a ‘Warehouse transfer’ in case of warehouse transfers.

12.1.3.2. Partial logistic unit

To move a partial logistic unit, press the ’Partial logistic unit’ button.

Identify source location

Identify the pick location or select it from a list after pressing the ’Select location’ button.

Scan an SSCC

Scan the SSCC to move. Only SSCC’s linked to the selected location can be scanned.

Identify product

If the No SSCC button is tapped, the system can move all the stock of the product regardless of whether or not the stock has an SSCC. If it has one or more SSCCs, the system chooses the SSCC to move.

When there are more than one item on the logistic unit/SSCC, or the Always scan product? option is enabled on the Move controller, the system will display a list of those items. Identify the item by scanning or selecting it from the list. When there is only one item on the logistic unit/pick location, the system will automatically proceed with that item.

When the item has more than one batch on that location, a list of batches will be displayed. Identify the product by selecting the batch. When there is only one batch, the system will automatically proceed with that batch.

Enter quantity

Enter the quantity to move. For more information about adding the quantity in Produmex see: 4.3.4. Screens for entering additional information

Identify destination location/SSCC

To move the selected products to an existing SSCC, scan the SSCC. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location on the next screen. The products will be moved to that logistic unit and location. Then the system will go back to the ‘Scan source location or GS1 label’ screen.

To create a new logistic unit, press the ‘New SSCC’ button then identify the destination location.

To move the selected products without changing the logistic unit, scan or select a location from a list.

When moving a partial pallet and the SSCC was not defined in this step (either by scanning an existing one or by creating a new one), then the products will be moved without a linked SSCC.

Scan the destination location or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select other location’ button. When the location suggestion option is not enabled to the warehouse, the system will display an additional ‘Select empty location’ button. To execute the move to an empty location, press this button and select a location from the list.

When the location suggestion is enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the first suggested location calculated based on the logic described in Location suggestions.

When the location suggestion is not enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the standard location set for the given warehouse on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data of the item. If the items to move have different standard location set for the warehouse, no default location is displayed.

In case of a warehouse transfer, the ‘Warehouse: move has been added (701)’ print event will be triggered after the destination location had been selected, if the print event is defined.

In case of a new SSCC has been created, the ‘Warehouse: a new LU has been created (700)’ print event will be triggered after the destination location had been selected, if the print event is defined.

Logistic unit/ items are moved

After scanning or selecting the destination location, the ad-hoc movement is registered and the system displays the message: Logistic unit/Items are moved.

The movement is booked as ‘Move’ in case of local moves or as a ‘Warehouse transfer’ in case of warehouse transfers.

12.1.3.3. Multiple logistic units

To move multiple logistic units at once, press the ’Multiple logistic units’ button.

Scan the SSCC’s

Scan the SSCC’s to move. The already scanned SSCC’s will be displayed in a list. After having all the SSCC’s to move scanned, proceed with the right arrow button.

Scan the destination location or GS1 label

Scan the destination location or select it from a list after pressing the ’Select other location’ button.

To group the scanned SSCC into a master SSCC, press the ’Move to new master SSCC’ button then select the destination location.

When the location suggestion is enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the first suggested location calculated based on the logic described in Location suggestions.

When the location suggestion is not enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the standard location set for the given warehouse on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data of the item. If the items to move have different standard location set for the warehouse, no default location is displayed.

When the location suggestion is not enabled, an additional ‘Select empty location’ button will be displayed. To execute the move to an empty location, press this button and select a location from the list.

In case of a warehouse transfer, the Warehouse: move has been added (701)’ print event will be triggered after the destination location had been selected, if the print event is defined.

In case of a new master SSCC has been created, the ‘Warehouse: a new master LU has been created (702)’ print event will be triggered after the destination location had been selected, if the print event is defined.

Logistic unit/ items are moved

After identifying the destination location, the ad-hoc movement is registered and the system displays the message: Logistic unit/Items are moved.

The movement is booked as ‘Move’ in case of local moves or as a ‘Warehouse transfer’ in case of warehouse transfers.

12.1.3.4. Bulk move

The bulk move will take stock from a silo/tank and move it to another silo/tank. The stock to move will be calculated by the consumption algorithm defined on the silo/tank.

Identify pick location

Identify the source silo/tank by scanning or selecting it from a list after pressing the ’Select location’ button.

Identify destination location

Then identify the destination location. This location also should be a silo or a tank. Scan or select the location from a list after pressing the ’Select location’ button.

Enter quantity

After selecting the destination location, add the quantity to move. For more information about adding the quantity in Produmex see: 4.3.4. Screens for entering additional information

Items are moved

After pressing the right arrow button, the move will be booked.

12.2. Move orders

There is a possibility to prepare moves by adding move orders in the office environment. The moves can be executed on the shopfloor.

12.2.1. Office

12.2.1.1. Order entry

There are two ways to add a move order to the system.
The first way is to select stock in the inventory report of Produmex.
One or more rows can be selected to group them in one move order. It is possible to select different items or products. Products stored on different locations can also be selected in one move order. The only limitation is that all the products to move should be in the same warehouse.
After selecting the stock to move, click on the ’Move’ button and select the ’Make move order’ option.
After clicking the ‘Make move order’ button the screen with the data of the move order is shown. This screen shows the details of the stock that needs to be moved. The system has copied the data from the current status in the inventory report.
Fill in the destination location, warehouse and LUID.

The second way to add a move order is to start from an empty move order and filling the needed data. Click on the menu entry ‘Move order’.

12.2.1.2. Move order screen

Header
Number
This is the number of the move order. This will be filled in when the move order is added.

Due Date
The due date of the move order. When entering a new move order the current date is used.

Type
The type of the move cannot be selected as the system will decide which type the order is based on the properties of the order. In case of moving stock within a warehouse, the order type will be ‘Move’. In case of moving stock in between warehouses, the order type will be ‘Warehouse transfer’. ‘Put away’ and ‘Replenishment’ type move orders are added to the system automatically and cannot be created by a user.

From warehouse
The source warehouse to move the stock from.

To warehouse
The destination warehouse the stock needs to be stored.

Priority
The priority the move order has.

Remarks
The remarks linked to the move order. When the move order is selected on the shopfloor, this remark will be shown.

Details
Item code – Barcode - Item name
The identification of the product.

Qty – Open Qty
The quantities.

Batch ID
The ITRI key of the stock.

Src. Stor. Loc.
The source location of the stock.

Src. Log. Unit
The source LUID of the stock.

Dest. Stor Loc.
The destination location of the stock. This location should be the same for all lines in the move order. When the source and destination warehouse are the same, all locations in the warehouse are allowed. In case the source and destination warehouse are different, the destination locations can only be the docks on source a destination warehouse.

Dest. Log. Unit.
The destination LUID. If provided, the LUID should be the same for all move order lines.

Quality status
The quality status of the stock.

Src.master log.Unit
The LUID of the master logistic unit where the stock to move is allocated.

Stock Level
The stock level corresponding to the move order line. By default ‘Detail’ is entered. This means all data in the lines are used ‘as is’. So if for example no source LUID is provided, the stock to move cannot have an LUID linked to it.

There is a second stock level ‘Item’. This means only the item and quantity are needed. Source LUID and batch ID are optional. If the data is provided, the user on the shopfloor will have to take the stock from that LUID/batch ID. But if this data is not provided, any batch or LUID can be taken when executing the move on the shopfloor.

The third stock level is ’Master SSCC’. This means that only the source master LUID and the destination location are needed. It is recommended to create move orders with Master SSCC level from an empty move order.

The stock in the move order will not be locked. This means other processes can use this stock if needed. For this reason the system will not check if the stock really exists at time of the creation of the move order. So it is possible that when the move order is executed on the shopfloor, the requested stock is not available anymore. An error message will show this when executing the move order.

12.2.1.3. Open move orders

It is possible to get a list of open move orders. Click on the menu entry ‘Open document report’ and select ‘Move order’ as the document type.

When selecting a move order the data of the move order can be changed if the move order is of type ‘Move order’ or ‘Warehouse transfer’ and if it has the status ‘Nothing moved’. In all other cases only the priority and remarks can be updated.

12.2.2. Shopfloor

MO_FLOW

To execute move order press the ‘Move order’ button.

12.2.2.1. Select move order

Select the move order to execute from the list. The move orders are ordered by priority, due date, move order number. If the move order is of type ‘Warehouse transfer’, it is indicated with an icon. After selecting the move order, the linked remarks will be displayed. Press ‘Ok’ to proceed.

12.2.2.2. Select item

Select an item to move from the list. Only items from the move order will be displayed in the list.

12.2.2.3. Identify source location/SSCC

Provide a source SSCC or location. There are three possibilities to enter the source SSCC or location, based on the data entered in the move order line.

  • LUID is provided on move order line:

In this case the SSCC defined on the move order line has to be scanned. No other SSCC is allowed. The SSCC and location of the SSCC is shown on the screen.

  • Stock level: Item and no LUID is provided on move order line:

When the stock level is ‘Item’ and no source detail was provided, the source LUID and batch are optional.
Identify an SSCC to move. The source location where the SSCC should be stored is shown on the screen.
To get all the stock available for the product to move, press the ‘No SSCC’ button. On the next screen, identify the source location.

  • Stock level = Detail and no LUID is provided:

When the stock level is ‘Detail’ and no source LUID was provided, then the product to move cannot have linked LUID. Because there is no linked LUID, in order to identify the product the source location should be specified first.
Scan the pick location or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select location’ button. Only the source location set in the order can be added. The source location is displayed on the screen.

12.2.2.4. Identify product

When an SSCC was scanned and all the items on that SSCC were ordered to move, the system skips this step and automatically moves the full SSCC. All screens to further identify the stock will be skipped, and a ‘Moving the full logistic unit… ‘ message will be shown. Press ‘Ok’ to proceed.

Scan the product to move, or select it after pressing the ‘Select a product’ button. Only the products stored on the location/SSCC are shown in the list.

If no SSCC was scanned and there are multiple SSCC’s found for the product on the location, select an SSCC to move. In case the location has stock that has no SSCC linked to it, an additional ‘No SSCC’ button will be displayed. Select the SSCC to move then proceed with the right arrow button or press the ‘No SSCC’ button to move stock with no linked SSCC.

When moving an item that has products with different batches on the selected location or SSCC, identify the product to move by selecting its batch from a list. The screen will be skipped when there are no different batches.

12.2.2.5. Enter the quantity

Enter the quantity to move. The added quantity cannot exceed the quantity in the move order.

12.2.2.6. Add new item(s)

The entered data is now added to a list of items to move and the system will get back to the ‘Select an item to move’ screen. Select the next move order line and proceed as described above.

12.2.2.7. Stop process

When there are items in the list of items to move, the ‘Stop’ button is enabled. Press the button to execute the move for all items in the list.

12.2.2.8. Go back

To go back, press the left arrow button. A confirmation screen will be shown if there are already added items in the list to move. Press the ‘Yes’ button to clear all the entered data and to go back to the ‘Select move order’ screen. Press the ‘No’ button to proceed.

12.2.2.7. Identify destination location/SSCC

When there are no more items to move, the screen to enter the destination location will be shown.

If an SSCC is scanned, the items will be added to the SSCC.
If the destination LUID is provided on the move order line, the destination SSCC has to be scanned and the screens to enter the destination location will be skipped.
If a location is scanned, the products will be stored on that location. It is possible to select the location from a list after pressing the ‘Select location’ button. When the location was defined in the move order, only the defined location can be scanned or selected.
To select an empty location, press the ‘Select empty location’ button and select it from a list. The locations in the list are locations allowed for the products by zone type.
To add the products to a new SSCC, press the ‘New SSCC’ button, then identify the destination location.
In case of a warehouse transfer, the ‘Warehouse: move has been added (701)’ print event will be triggered after the destination location had been selected, if the print event is defined.
In case of a new SSCC has been created, the ‘Warehouse: a new LU has been created (700)’ print event will be triggered and the logistic label will be printed after the destination location had been selected, if the print event is defined.

12.2.2.9. Logistic unit/Items are moved

After identifying the destination location, the movement is registered and the system confirms that the logistic unit has been moved. The movement will be booked as a ‘Move’ in case of local moves or a ‘Warehouse transfer’ in case of moving stock between warehouses.

12.3. Replenishment

When replenishment configurations are set for a location or an item, the replenish tool will automatically create replenish orders when the following conditions are met:

  • the stock reaches the minimum quantity set for the location or item
  • there are available stock on the bulk locations for the replenishment

The replenishment orders can be executed on the shopfloor.
Replenish tool also generates a ‘ReplenishTool’ log file.

12.3.1. Configuration

12.3.1.1. Replenishment generator

Select the replenishment type at the ‘Replenishment generator’.

  • ‘Generates replenishment orders (DEREPGEN)’ replenishment orders are triggered based on the configurations on the pick locations.
  • ‘Generates item based replenishment orders (BREPGEN)’ : replenishment orders are triggered based on the configuration on the item master data.

For more information about the replenishment generator see: 5.1.3.50. Replenishment generator

12.3.1.2. Item master data

Extra configurations needed for the item based type replenishment order. Add a value to the ‘Replenishment: Quantity on pick locations’ and ‘Estimated sales quantity by month’ field in the Item Master Data.
For more information about the Item Master Data settings see: 3.1.3. Produmex Sales Tab

12.3.1.3. Pick location

Enable the ‘Can be replenished’ option and adjust the minimum, maximum and replenish quantity of the item for the pick location to be replenished.
For more information about the bin settings see: 5.2.6. Bin settings

12.3.2. Process

To execute the replenish orders, press the ‘Replenish pick locations’ button. Reach the button from Logistics > Move.

Select zoneSelect replenish order lineIdentify source logistic unit or locationIdentify productEnter quantityScan destination location/SSCCLogistic unit/Item are moved

Click on the flowchart element to go to the relevant section of the page or to open related documentation.

12.3.2.1. Select a zone

If the ‘Select zone on replenishment flow? (Y/N)’ option is enabled on the Replenishment generator, then select a zone first. A zone is listed there is a location in the zone that is the destination location of a replenishment order.

12.3.2.2. Select replenish order line

On the next screen every open line of replenishment orders from the warehouses assigned to the scanner is listed. If a zone was selected, only the lines of replenishment orders for locations that belong to the selected zone are listed.

In the example the replenishment order (1036) for a specific pick location (A0003) is split in multiple lines, because the system requires product from multiple sources (locations, SSCC’s, batches…) to assemble the required replenishment quantity to fulfill the order.

12.3.2.3. Identify source logistic unit or location

After selecting the replenishment order, scan the source SSCC. The bulk location and the source SSCC are displayed on the screen. Only the SSCC from the order can be scanned. If the scanned SSCC is a mono pallet with the exact same quantity as the quantity to replenish, the system automatically proceeds to the Scan destination location screen.
In case of there is no SSCC present, scan the pick location or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select location’ button.

12.3.2.4. Identify product

If multiple items are stored on the logistic unit or bulk location, identify the product to move. Scan the product or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select a product’ button. Every item that is stored on the logistic unit/bulk location is listed, but only the item to replenish can be scanned or selected.
If there is only one item on the SSCC/ location, the system will automatically proceed with that item.

12.3.2.5. Enter quantity

Enter the quantity. By default the quantity on the replenish order line will be displayed, but it is possible to proceed with another quantity. The maximum quantity depends on the quantity of the item on the SSCC/ location.

12.3.2.6. Scan destination location/SSCC

After having identified the products to move, scan the destination location or SSCC. To select the destination location from a list, press the ‘Select location’ button.
It is possible to move the products to a new logistic unit. Press the ‘New SSCC’ button, then identify the destination location.

12.3.2.7. Logistic unit/Item moved

After having confirmed the destination location, the system registers the move of the logistic units or items and goes back to the ‘Select a replenish order’ screen.
When all replenish order lines are processed, the replenish order is closed.

12.4. Consolidated move

This move is used for executing put aways or ad-hoc moves in a group. The input of the consolidated move can be either a location or SSCC’s.

12.4.1. Initiate the flow

To initiate the flow, press the ‘Consolidated move’ button. The button can be reached via: Logistic > Move

12.4.2. Scan an SSCC or location

When using SSCC’s as an input, scan the SSCC’s to move. The already scanned SSCC’s will be displayed in a list. After scanning all the SSCCs, press the right arrow button to proceed. The items located on the logistic units will be displayed in a list.

When using a location as an input, scan the location or press the ‘Select location’ button and select a pick location from the list. The items located on that location will be displayed in a list.

12.4.3. Identify product

Press the ‘Move everything’ button to move all the products displayed in the list or select an item to identify the product to move.

When moving an item that has products with different batches on the selected location or SSCC, identify the product to move by selecting its batch from a list. On the next screen add the quantity. The entered quantity cannot exceed the quantity in stock on from the selected batch on the location.

To move every batch, press the ‘Move everything’ button.

When moving products that are stored on more than one logistic unit on the selected location, identify the products by selecting an SSCC from the list. On the next screen add the quantity. The entered quantity cannot exceed the item quantity on the logistic unit.

When there are products on the selected location without a logistic unit, instead of the ‘Move everything’ button an ‘Other tasks’ button will be displayed. After pressing this button two buttons will be displayed:

  • Move everything
  • No SSCC

To select the products without a logistic unit, press the ‘No SSCC’ button. On the next screen add the quantity. The entered quantity cannot exceed the quantity on stock.

12.4.4. Identify destination location/ SSCC

To move the selected products to an existing SSCC, scan the SSCC. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location on the next screen. The products will be moved to that logistic unit and location. Then the system will go back to the ‘Scan source location or GS1 label’ screen.

To create a new logistic unit, press the ‘New SSCC’ button then identify the destination location.

To move the selected products without changing the logistic unit, simply scan or select a location from a list.

Please note: Products will be moved without a linked SSCC in the following cases:

  • When moving a partial pallet and the SSCC was not defined
  • When moving every pallet containing the selected item from the location and there is a mixed pallet containing other items among the pallets to move

Scan the destination location or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select other location’ button. When the location suggestion option is not enabled to the warehouse, the system will display an additional ‘Select empty location’ button. To execute the move to an empty location, press this button and select a location from the list.

When the location suggestion is enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the first suggested location calculated based on the logic described in Location suggestions.

When the location suggestion is not enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the standard location set for the given warehouse on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data of the item. If the items to move have different standard location set for the warehouse, no default location is displayed.

When creating a new SSCC the ’Warehouse: a new LUI has been created (700)’ print event will be triggered and the logistic label will be printed after the destination location had been selected.

12.4.5. Logistic unit/Items are moved

After identifying the destination location, the movement is registered and the system displays the message: Logistic unit/Items are moved. The movement will be booked as a ‘Move’.

When there are still items to move, the system goes back to the ‘Select a product’ screen. When everything was moved from the location or the selected logistic units, the system displays the message ‘No more items to move’ then goes back to the ‘Scan SSCC or location’ screen.

12.5. Receive from WHS flow

This flow is used to move stock from a warehouse that is not managed by Produmex to a warehouse that is managed by Produmex.

It uses an 'Inventory transfer request' document to move the stock between warehouses.

Select a dockSelect an inventory transfer requestScan the GS1 barcode(s)Identify identical logistic unitsIdentify productEnter batch dataEnter quantityAdd more products from the logistic unitFinish process

12.5.1. Setup source warehouse

This flow will use a transit warehouse not managed by Produmex as the source warehouse. Adjust the settings of the source warehouse on the User Defined Fields of the 'Warehouses-Setup' screen.

Setup source WHS

12.5.2. Initiate the flow

To initiate the flow, press the ‘Receive from WHS’ button. The button can be reached via two paths:

  • Logistics > Move > Receive from WHS
  • Purchase > Receive from WHS

12.5.3. Select a dock

Select the receiving dock from the list of the available locations or enter the code of the dock. Press the right arrow key to proceed.

12.5.4. Select an inventory transfer request

Select the inventory transfer request from the list of the orders or enter the number of the inventory transfer request. Press the right arrow key to proceed.

12.5.5. Scan the GS1 barcode(s)

Scan the barcode(s) on the logistic unit. After having all the barcodes scanned, press the ’Done’ button. All the information from the GS1 barcodes will be saved into the memory and the system will not ask additional questions about the scanned information.

If there is no label on the logistic unit, press the ’No label on the logistic unit’ button.

12.5.6. Identify identical logistic units

If there are no SSCC barcodes among the scanned barcodes, or there is no label on the logistic unit, the system will ask if there are identical logistic units.

If there are identical logistic units, press the button ’Identical logistic units’. After pressing this button, the system will ask the quantity of the identical logistic units. Enter the number of the logistic units. The number of the logistic units is not limited. Press the right arrow key to proceed.

If there are no identical logistic units, press the ’No identical logistic units’ button.

12.5.7. Identify product

Scan the barcode or press the ’Select a product’ button. After pressing the ’Select a product’ button, select the product from the list.

12.5.8. Enter batch data

If the batch number was not scanned previously, select it from the list. At this step, new batch numbers cannot be added to the system. Only batches available in the source warehouse can be selected.

Based on the item settings, additional data can be entered to the batch. Eg: Best Before Date, second batch number, batch attributes, etc.

12.5.9. Enter quantity

Enter the item quantity or scan the serial numbers. The entered quantity cannot exceed the open quantity defined in the inventory transfer request.

When an item has a serial number, the system will automatically offer the scanning option.

Based on the settings of the catch weight function, the system might ask for entering the weight as well.

After having entered the quantity, the system might print the item label(s), depending on the item settings.

12.5.10. Add more products from the logistic unit

After having entered the quantity, the system will ask whether there are other products on the logistic unit that are not scanned.

If there are other products on the logistic unit, press the ’Yes’ button. Identify the products on the logistic unit by going back to the Identify product step. For finishing the process, press the ’Receive items’ button. When pressing the ’Receive items’ button the system will book the inventory transfer.

If there are no other products on the logistic unit, press the ’No’ button. When pressing the ’No’ button the system will register the item. The data of the registered items is stored in ASN tables.

Because the data of the registered items is stored in the system, it is possible to continue the flow after an abortion without booking the items.

If there were no SSCC barcodes among the scanned barcodes, or there was no label on the logistic unit, the system will generate an SSCC barcode. The system will also trigger the ’Warehouse: a new LU has been created (700)’ print event and will print the logistic label. The default report for this print event is the ’DefaultLogisticsLabel.rpt’.

If the Move all items in 1 stock transfer? option is disabled on the Receive from WHS controller, the Inventory Transfer document is created and the system returns to the Select an inventory transfer request screen.

If that option is enabled, the system goes back to the Scan the GS1 barcode screen. On this screen an additional ‘Receive items’ button is displayed. The Inventory Transfer document is only created after the ‘Receive items’ button is pressed.

12.5.11. Finish process

Continue the flow on a next logistic unit by going back to the Scan the GS1 barcode(s) step. For finishing the process, press the ’Receive items’ button.

When pressing the ’Receive items’ button the system books the inventory transfer.The system also triggers the ’Warehouse: move has been added (701)’ print event and prints the delivery document.

After having booked the items, the system goes back to the Select an order screen, and the flow can be continued with another inventory transfer request.

12.5.12. Continue the flow after an abortion

In case of quitting after the item registration, the system offers the option ’Book receipt’. Despite not booking the receipt, the flow can be continued after the registration step, because the system stores the data of the registered items in ASN tables.

If there are registered items in the system that were not booked, after the Select an inventory transfer request step the system will ask whether to remove the registered items.

When pressing the ’Remove registered items’ button, the system will remove the registered items and the flow will continue from the Scan the GS1 barcode(s) step. When pressing the right arrow key, the flow will proceed with the registered items.

13. Proof of delivery

While the functionality of exporting and importing the EPOD files described in this documentation is still valid, Boyum IT no longer sells or provides the EPOD solution. It is the responsibility of the user to make sure that the export/import files are converted with the user's own EPOD solution.

13.1. Prerequisites

13.1.1. Settings

Adjust the settings of the proof of delivery on the 5.1.3.63. Proof of delivery controller.

13.1.2. Adjust the Notification Listener

Make sure that the Notification Listener is installed. For more information about the installation of the Notification Listener see: 3.2.4. Produmex SB1 Notification listener, 3.3.3. Enable the Notification Listener stored procedure.

Update the configuration file of the Notification Listener. The file is located in the installation folder of the Produmex SB1 Notification Listener, for example: C:\Program Files\Produmex\Produmex SB1 Notification Listener\

The configuration file is called ‘Produmex.Foundation.SboNotification.ServiceHost.exe.config’.

Open the file with a text editor (e.g. Notepad).

Locate the line below and uncomment it:

 <action senderType="P" objectType="POD_RTHE" transactionType="U" logic="Produmex.Sbo.Logex.SboNotification.Actions.Interfacing.NotificationQueue, Produmex.Sbo.Logex.SboNotification.Actions"/> 

To create the export files for the proof of delivery solution, enable the Notification Listener procedure.

  • To run the Notification Listener in the background, start it from Windows\Control Panel\ Programs and Features\.
  • To run the Notification Listener with an open console, launch the RunConsole.bat file from the installation folder of the Produmex SB1 Notification Listener, for example: C:\Program Files\Produmex\Produmex SB1 Notification Listener\.

13.2. Perform delivery

13.2.1. Create a new route

When creating a route where a proof of delivery is needed, set the Route for ‘Proof of delivery’? option to true on the Create new route screen.

It is also possible to modify this setting on the Route detail window.

13.2.2. Export file

Perform the delivery on the fat client. Collect the stock based on the pick list, pack the goods then start the shipping. After every logistic unit has been loaded, the system displays the ‘Adding sales delivery notes in SAP. Can take some seconds… ‘ message regardless of using the proof for deliver function or not.

When the Route for ‘Proof of delivery’? option is enabled for the route, the system does not create a sales delivery note until the delivery is confirmed. By the help of the Notification Listener an export file is created for the proof of delivery solution. A separate file will be generated for each route.

The export file will be created to the ’Interface monitor output path’ defined on the Config tab on the company level of the Organizational Structure.

Export file naming convention: PMX_EPOD_Route_routekey_timestamp.csv

The file contains information about the customer, address and goods delivered.

When the export file was not created, first check if the Notification Listener is running.

After the shipping, the status of the route will be changed to ‘POD pending’. The pick list will remain open with the status ‘Packed’.

In the inventory record the stock to deliver will remain on the shipping dock. The stock will be locked for the pick list until the delivery has been confirmed.

The proof of delivery solution takes the output files as an input.

13.2.3. Import file

After the delivery has been confirmed, the proof of delivery solution creates an import file with the confirmation data. A separate file will be generated for each delivery address.

After the synchronization, the file will be imported to the folder defined with the ‘Interface monitor input path’ on the Config tab on the company level of the Organizational Structure.

The signature images and the captured pictures from the delivery solution will be imported to the folder defined in the 5.1.3.63. Proof of delivery controller

Import file naming convention: EPOD_PMX_EPOD_Route_routekey_jobsequencenumber_timestamp.csv

The file contains information about the route, the goods delivered and the failed deliveries. Start the Interfacing tool with the /t:POD /d:import /rf parameters.

With the help of the Interfacing tool, Produmex imports the file from the proof of delivery solution and creates the sales delivery note. The delivery note only contains the SSCC’s or quantities confirmed with the proof of delivery solution. On the ‘Attachments’ tab links to the signature and other images are inserted.

Based on the import file, the system closes the confirmed pick list lines and generates the sales delivery note. Pick lists linked to a failed delivery will remain open. The system unlinks those open pick lists from the route, and closes the route.

After the Interfacing tool processed the import file, it is moved to the archive or the error folder defined on the Config tab on the company level of the Organizational Structure.

14. Quality types

Produmex offers the functionality of measuring the quality of the goods during the following processes:

  • Reception
    • Document type = 20
  • Bulk reception
    • Document type = 20
  • Production
    • Document type = 202
  • Production receipt
    • Document type = 202
  • Disassembly
    • Document type = 202

Define quality types and valid values

First define the quality types on the Produmex Quality Types UDF. Open the table via: Tool > Default Forms > PMX_QUTY Produmex quality types. For more information see: 3.2.3.33. Quality types

Set the valid values for quality types with the convertor type „List” on the Produmex quality valid values UDF. Open the table via: Tool > Default Forms > PMX_QUVV Produmex quality valid values. For more information see: 3.2.3.34. Quality type valid values

Perform the reception

Perform the reception on your terminal. Based on the value set as ‘Moment of capture’ on the Produmex quality types UDF, the system will ask the quality type in the beginning or in the end of the reception.
The input screen type will vary based on the convertor type.

Int. and Double List
“Int. and Double” “List”
String Date
“String"“Date”

Access the data

The data can be accessed by using the following query:

SELECT OPDN."Docnum", OPDN."CardCode", OPDN."CardName", "@PMX_QUTY"."Name", "PMX_QUVA"."QualityValue"
FROM OPDN
LEFT OUTER JOIN PMX_QUVA ON OPDN."DocEntry" = PMX_QUVA."BaseEntry" AND OPDN."ObjType" = PMX_QUVA."BaseType"
INNER JOIN "@PMX_QUTY" ON PMX_QUVA."QualityTypeCode" = "@PMX_QUTY"."Code"

15. Production

Production manager screens

Production zone

This screen provides an overview of the running production orders and the inventory in the available lined up locations.

Overview production

Production line
This is the name of the production line. Only active production lines are listed.
When the ‘Only 1 started production order allowed’ option is not flagged for the Production line, it is possible to start more than one production order on the line. Every started production order is displayed in a separate row.

Production order number
This is the number of the production order. Production orders with ‘Started’ status assigned to the production line are displayed.

Item code
The code of the item to produce.

Description
The description of the item to produce.

#done
The quantity that is already produced.

#to do
The quantity that still has to be produced. It is calculated by: {Planned quantity – Done quantity}.

#planned
The planned quantity in the production order.

Status
The status of the production line. The status can be ‘Started’, if there is a started production on the line or ‘Free’, if there is no started production on the line.

Tank details

Tank
The name of the silo/ tank. Every lined up silo/ tank location is listed.

Item code
The code of the item stored in the silo/tank.

Description
The description of the item stored in the silo/tank.

Batch
The batch number of the item stored in the silo/tank.

# in tank
The available quantity of the item in the tank.

Production line
The code of the production line where the silo/tank is in use.

Press the ‘Refresh’ button to refresh the screen.
Press the ‘Close’ button to close the screen.
Press the ‘Detail’ button to open the ‘Production detail’ window for the selected production order.
Press the ‘production orders’ button to open the ‘Production order’ window.

Production order

On this screen production orders can be released and started.

Select the production line from the dropdown menu.
Production orders without an assigned production line and production orders that are assigned to the selected production line are listed on the screen.

Production n°
The number of the production order.

Date
The due date of the production.

Item code
The code of the item to produce.

Description
The description of the item to produce.

Quantity
The planned quantity in the production order.

Status
The Produmex status of the production order. Possible values: Planned, On hold, Released, Started.

Production line
The assigned production line of the order.
When the production order has no assigned production line, this field is empty. When the selected production line is assigned to the production order, the value is the code of the production line. Production orders assigned to another production line are not displayed on the list.

Press the ‘Release order’ button to release the production order. Only ‘Planned’ production orders can be released.
Press the ‘Start production order’ button to open the Start production screen. Only ‘Released’ production orders can be started.
Press the ‘Production line details’ button to open the Production detail screen. The button is only active if the status of the selected production order is ‘Started’.
Press the ‘Close’ button to close the screen and go back to the Production zone screen.

Start production

On this screen the production order can be started. It is also possible to assign the lined up location for lined up components and to modify the batch number and best before date, depending on the item details and the production settings.

Production order
The number of the production order.

Item
The code and description of the item to produce.

Quantity to make
The planned quantity in the production order.

Batch number
Batch number of the product to produce. This field is only displayed when the item has batch numbers.

Batch number 2
Batch number of the product to produce. This field is only displayed when the item has second batch numbers.
Adjust the batch number settings on the 5.1.3.4. Batchnumber production company.

Best before date
Best before date of the product to produce. This field is only displayed if the item has a best before date. Adjust the best before date settings in the 3.2.3.29. Expiry definition UDT and the 5.1.3.6. Best before for production generator.

Lined up tanks

Item code
The item code of the component that has to be lined up.

Description
The item description of the component that has to be lined up.

Tank
The tank assigned to the component.

Tanks

Tank
List of lined up locations added to the production line. For more information about the production line settings see: 5.2.3. Production line settings.

#in tank
The available quantity of the selected item in the tank.

Produce?
Displays whether the ‘Produce ingredients’ option is enabled or not for the lined up location on the production line. For more information about the settings for the added lined up locations see: 5.2.3. Production line settings.

To assign a tank for the selected component, select a tank and press the ‘Assign tank’ button.
Press the ‘Start production’ button to start the production.
Press the ‘Close’ button to close the screen and go back to the Production order screen.

Production detail

On this screen the production can be finished. Produced and theoretical consumed quantities are displayed.

Header

See: start production

Finished product

Quantity made
The produced quantity.

Quantity still to make
The quantity that still has to be produced.

Ingredients (not lined up)

Item code
The item code of the component. Every not lined up component from the production order are listed here.

Description
The item description of the component.

#to pick
The quantity that still needs to be picked.

#on input
The available quantity of the component on the input location of the production line.

#on line
The available quantity of the component on the production line.

#used
The consumed quantity.

Ingredients (lined up)

Item code
The item code of the component that has to be lined up. Every lined up component from the production order is listed here.

Description
The item description of the component.

#still needed
The quantity that still has to be consumed for the production.

#used
The consumed quantity.

#in tank
The available quantity of the component in the tank.

Tank
The lined up location assigned for the component. It is possible to change the tank: press the ‘Change tank’ button.

Tanks

Tank
List of lined up locations added to the production line. For more information about the production line settings see: 5.2.3. Production line settings.

#in tank
The stock of the selected item available on the lined up location.

Press the ‘Refresh’ button the refresh the screen.
Press the ‘Finish production’ to open the Stop production screen.
Press the ‘Close’ button to close the screen and go back to the Production order screen.

Stop production

On this screen the material consumption can be confirmed and the production order(s) can be closed.

Stop production - production manager type: SPL_CONS_LOCK

When finishing a production order linked to a production line where the SPL_CONS_LOCK option is set as the production manager type, the following screen opens:
On this screen only one production order can be closed.

Header

See: start production

Ingredients (lined up)

Item code
The item code of the component that has to be lined up. Every component from the production order that has to be lined up is listed here. Different batches are displayed in separate lines.

Description
The item description of the component.

Batch 1- Batch 2 – BBD – SSCC
The batch details of the component in analogical order.

#on line
The available quantity of the item on the production line.

#used
The consumed quantity.

weight used
The consumed weight. (In case of catch weight items.)

#remaining
The quantity remaining on the production line. It is calculated from the #on line and the #used quantity.

weight remaining
The weight remaining on the production line.

Serial numbers
Click on this field to add the serial numbers of the used products.

Ingredients (lined up)

Item code
The item code of the component that has to be lined up. Every component from the production order that has to be lined up is listed here.
If the ‘Direct consumption of goods’ option is flagged for the silo/tank, the products stored on that location will not be displayed.

Description
The item description of the component.

#used
The consumed quantity.

weight used
The consumed weight.

#remaining
The quantity remaining in the lined up location.

Tank
The lined up location assigned to the component.

Press the ‘Stop’ production screen to close the production order.
Press the ‘Close’ button to close the screen and go back to the Production detail screen.

Stop production - production manager type: MPL_CONS_INPUT

When finishing a production order linked to a production line where the MPL_CONS_INPUT option is set as the production manager type, the following screen opens:
On this screen multiple production orders assigned to different production lines can be closed.

Active production orders

Production line
The code of the production line. A production line is listed if:

  • has the same input location
  • there is a started production order

Production order number
This is the number of the production order. Production orders with ‘Started’ status assigned to the production line are displayed.

Item code
The code of the item to produce.

# done
The quantity that is already produced.

# planned
The planned quantity in the production order.

Ingredients (not lined up)

Item code
The item code of the component. Every not lined up component from the selected production order are listed here.

Description
The item description of the component.

#theoretical
The theoretical quantity is calculated by: {Produced quantity*Base quantity of the component}.

#used
The used quantity is calculated by: {(component’s theoretical quantity for the production order/ ? theoretical quantity of the component)*quantity on the input location}.

EXAMPLE:

Production line A
Produced quantity: 1

Item code Base Qty #Theoretical Qty on input location #Used
Component 0122124
Component 021155

Production line B
Produced quantity: 2

Item code Base Qty #Theoretical Qty on input location #Used
Component 0124126

Weight used
The consumed weight.

Ingredients (lined up)

Item code The item code of the component that has to be lined up. Each lined up component from the listed production orders are listed. Different batches are displayed in separate lines. If the ‘Direct consumption of goods’ option is flagged for the silo/tank, the products stored on that location will not be displayed.

Description
The item description of the component.

#theoretical
The theoretical quantity is calculated by: {Produced quantity*Base quantity of the component}.

# used
The consumed quantity.

Weight used
The consumed weight.

# remaining
The quantity remaining in the lined up location.

Location
The lined up location assigned to the component.

Press the ‘Stop production’ button to close every listed production order.
Press the ‘Close’ button to close the screen and go back to the Production detail screen.

Production Guide

The process chain of the production consists the following steps:

  1. creating a production order
  2. releasing the production order
  3. picking for the production
  4. starting the production
  5. moving the components to the production line
  6. producing
  7. finishing the production

Production overview

1. Configuration settings for the production

Before starting the production process, adjust the following configuration settings:

1.1. Quality status
Define the default status for the produced items. At the company level of the Organizational Structure go to the Production tab. Select the quality status from the dropdown menu. For more information about the quality status see: 5.1.9. Quality status

1.2. Production line settings
Adjust the settings of the production lines. For more information about the production line settings see: 5.2.3. Production line settings

1.3. Production controller
Customize the settings of the production in the production controller. For more information about the production controller see: 5.1.3.48. Production controller

1.4. Picking for production
Customize the settings of the picking in the Picking for production controller. For more information about the controller see: 5.1.3.47. Picking for production controller

1.5. Batch number of the product
When producing items managed by batches, specify the settings of the batch number.
On the Batchnumber production company controller, select an extension to define the batch number format. Adjust the batch number settings on the controller. For more information about the batch number controller see: 5.1.3.4. Batchnumber production company

1.6. Best before date for the product
The best before date settings can be specified for items with best before dates.
Adjust the calculation formula of the best before date on the 3.2.3.29. Expiry definition UDT. Link the expiry definition to the item in the Produmex Production tab on the 3.1. Produmex Production Tab.
Adjust the settings of the best before date modification on the Best before for production generator. For more information about the generator see: 5.1.3.6. Best before for production generator

1.7. Item settings
Adjust the settings of the product and the materials in the Produmex Production tab of the Item Master Data. For more information see: 3.1.3. Produmex Item Master Data Tabs

1.8. Scale configuration
It is possible to integrate a scale to the production process. For more information see:8. How to setup/ integrate a scale with Produmex

2. Create a production order

Create a production order in SAP B1. For more information about the Produmex extensions on the ’Bill of Materials’ and ’Production Order’ screens see: 3.3. Production When a production order is created, both the SAP and Produmex status of the order is ‘Planned’.

3. Release the production order

Production orders can be released in the office environment only. The order release can be performed on the production order or on the production manager.

3.1. Production order
3.1.1. Assign the production line on the production order

Please note that the production line can only be assigned or changed on the production order if the SAP status of the order is ‘Planned’.

Select a production line from the dropdown menu next to the ‘Warehouse’ field. Only the active production lines located in the product’s warehouse are listed.

3.1.2. Release the order

Change the SAP status of the order from ‘Planned’ to ‘Released’ then press the ‘Update’ button. The Produmex status of the order will remain ‘Planned’ until the production is started. As long as the Produmex status is ‘Planned’, the SAP status of a released order can be changed to ‘Planned’ or to ‘Closed’.

3.2. Production manager

Open the ‘Production manager’ from the Produmex Production menu. For more information about the Production manager screens see: Production manager screens

Press the ‘Production orders’ button to open the ‘Production order’ screen.
On the Production order screen select the production line from the dropdown menu.

Select a production order from the list. The following production orders will be listed:

  • Production orders without an assigned production line. These production orders will be listed under every production line. The ‘Production line’ field is empty.
  • Production orders assigned to the selected production line.

To release the order click on the ‘Release order’ button. The status of the order will be changed from ‘Planned’ to ‘Released’. The ‘Release order’ button is only active when the status of the selected line is ‘Planned’.
After a production order without an assigned production line has been released, the production still can be started at any free production line.

4. Start the production order

Production orders can be started in the office environment or on the shopfloor.
When using the ‘Receipt from Production’ flow, it is possible to start multiple production orders on one production line, except if the ‘Only 1 started production order allowed’ option is set to true for the production line. For more information see: 5.2.3. Production line settings
When using the ‘Production’ flow, only one started production order is allowed on the production line.

4.1. Office

In the office environment the production order can be started on the production order or on the Production Manager.

Production order
Click on the ’Start’ button to start the production order. The button is only active is the following verifies:

  • The status of the production order is released.
  • The production order has an assigned production line.

A ‘Start production’ window will open up. Click on the ’Cancel’ button to close the form.

Production manager
Open the Production Manager and click on the ’Production orders’ button. Select the production line from the dropdown menu. Select the production order and click on the ‘Start production order’ button. The button is only active when the status of the selected order is ‘Released’.

A ‘Start production’ window will open up. To go back to the previous screen, click on ‘Cancel’.

4.1.1. Assign a tank

When there is a component that has to be lined up, assign a tank to the component on the ‘Start production’ screen before starting the production order.
Select a component from the ‘Lined up tanks’ section. Then select a location listed under ‘Tanks’. Only locations that verify for the following are listed:

  • the location is lined up
  • the location is added to the production line as a lined up location
  • there is stock of the component available on the location

Press the ‘Assign tank’ button. After a lined up location has been assigned to the component, the code of the location is displayed in the ‘Tank’ field.
When the ‘Auto line up selection’ option is enabled on the Item Master Data of the component, the system will automatically line up the location for the component.

4.1.2. Batch number and best before date

When the produced item is managed by batches and/or has a best before date, based on the settings, the batch number and the best before date can be changed on this screen. For more information about the batch number and best before date settings for production see: 1.5. Batch number of the product, 1.6. Best before date for the product. Enter the batch number(s) and/or select the best before date from the calendar.

4.1.3. Start the production order

After the lined up locations have been assigned and the batch number(s) and best before date have been defined, click on the ‘Start production’ button to start the production.
After the production order has been started, the status will be changed from ‘Released’ to ‘Started’ and the order will be assigned to the production line where it was started. On the production order the Produmex order will be changed to ‘Started’. The SAP status will remain ‘Released’.
The ‘Production line details’ button is only active when a production order with the status ‘Started’ is selected. It opens up the ‘Production details’ screen.

4.1.4. Change tank

It is possible to change the assigned lined up location after the production has been started. On the ‘Production detail’ screen select a component from ‘Ingredients (lined up)’ list. Then select a lined up location from the ‘Tanks’ list. Click on the ‘Change tank’ button. This button is only active if the selected lined up location is not assigned to the component.
A ‘Production – swap tank’ window will open up.
Add the quantity or weight remaining in the previous tank to the respective field.

4.2. Shopfloor

Production orders can be started also on the shopfloor. When using the default settings, the production order can be started only in the ‘Production’, Disassembly’ and ‘Disassembly – weight’ flows. When the ‘Allow starting production order on production receipt flow?’ option is enabled on the Production controller, the production order can be started also in the ‘Receipt from Production’ flow.

For the detailed description about starting production orders on the shopfloor see:

5. Production picking

In the picking step collect the needed components for the production. Based on the Production line settings, the destination of the picking can be the input location or the pick to location.

Produmex offers two flows for picking the components of a production. The ‘Picking for production’ flows uses the production order as an input. Because the picking is performed without a pick list, the stock to be picked is not locked in the inventory. The picked quantity can exceed the planned quantity in the production order.

The ‘Pick list for production’ flow uses a pick list generated from the production order as an input. The system will lock the stock when creating the proposal and the pick list. Pick lists can only be generated from a production order when the ‘Create proposal for picking’ option is set to true in the Picking for production controller. The picked quantity cannot exceed the proposed quantity in the pick list.

5.1. Picking for production

Picking for production

Press the ‘Picking for production’ button. On the next screen select a task.
Press the ‘Normal picking for production’ button to pick for the production.
Press the ‘Unpick’ button to remove previously picked stock from the pick/input location.

When the ‘Allow continuous picking for production’ option is enabled on the Picking for production controller, an additional ’Continuous picking for production’ button is displayed on the screen. When performing the picking with this flow, the system will allow to pick production order lines whose full quantity has been picked.

Picking for production flow

Normal picking for productionSelect moveable locationSelect a product to pickSelect alternate stockIdentify SSCC/ pick locationIdentify SSCC/ pick locationIdentify SSCC/ pick locationIdentify productSelect destination location
5.1.1. Normal picking for production
5.1.1.1. Select production order

Select a production order to pick from the list. Only production orders with an assigned production line and ‘Released’ or ‘Started’ status are displayed in the list. Proceed with the right arrow button. The following information is shown on the list:

Select production order

  1. The production order number. Started production orders are indicated with an icon.
  2. The order type. It is possible to pick for ‘Standard’, ‘Special’ and ‘Disassembly’ type of production orders too with this flow. ‘Standard’ and ‘Special’ production orders are indicated with an icon and ‘Disassembly’ production orders are indicated with an icon.
  3. The code, description and barcode of the item to produce.
  4. The destination location of the picking. Depending on the Production line settings, the input or the pick to location of the production line is assigned to the production order.
  5. The due date of the production order.
  6. The batch number of the product.
5.1.1.2. Select moveable location

Press the ‘No moveable location’ button or select a moveable location from a list to move the picked items with a moveable location. The steps for picking with or without a moveable location are identical except for the cancellation. When picking onto a moveable location, the list of the already picked items cannot be cleared. Select moveable location

5.1.1.3. Select a product to pick

Select a product to pick

Select a production order line to pick from the list. Proceed with the right arrow button. The following information is shown on the list:

  1. The code, description and barcode of the item to pick.
  2. The quantity that still needs to be picked. It is calculated by: {Already picked quantity - Planned quantity}. When picking with the ‘Normal picking for production’ flow, the production order lines whose full quantity has been picked are not displayed on the list. When picking with the ’Continuous picking for production’ flow, those order lines are displayed too.
  3. The available quantity on the input location of the assigned production line.
  4. Optional components are indicated with an icon.
  5. Lined up and time registry components are not listed.
5.1.1.4. Identify SSCC/ pick location

Identify the SSCC or location to pick from. The system sorts the proposed stock based on the option selected as ‘Picking order by’ in the Picking for production controller. The details of the first proposed stock will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.
When the proposed stock to pick has a linked SSCC, the ‘Scan an SSCC’ screen is displayed. On the bottom of the screen the pick location and the SSCC is shown. Scan the SSCC.
In case of the scanned SSCC was linked to a single item or batch pallet, the system asks whether to move the full pallet or not. Press the ‘Yes’ button to move the full logistic unit. Press ‘No’ to move only a partial unit.
To pick only a partial pallet, press the ‘Pick partial logistic unit’ button. On the next screen scan the SSCC. When moving only a partial logistic unit, identify the products to move.

Identify SSCC

When the proposed stock to pick has no linked SSCC, identify the pick location. Scan the location or select it from the list after pressing the ‘Select location’ button. Only the location that is displayed on the bottom of the screen can be scanned or selected.

Identify pick location

5.1.1.5. Select alternate stock

Select alternate stock To pick from another SSCC or location, press the ‘Alternate stock’ button and select a production line from the list and proceed with the right arrow button. The following information is shown on the list:

  1. Pick location
  2. Quantity to pick
  3. Code, description, barcode of the item to pick
  4. Batch number
  5. Best before date
  6. SSCC

On the next screen scan the SSCC or the pick location.

5.1.1.6. Identify product

Identify the product to pick. In case a full logistic unit is moved, the system automatically skips the following screens.
Scan the product or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select a product’ button. Only items stored on the selected logistic unit or pick location are displayed on the list.

Identify product

Select the batch from the list. The following information is shown on the list:

  1. Batch number
  2. Second batch number
  3. Best before date
  4. Quality status

When there is only one batch on the location or the logistic unit for the item, then the system automatically proceeds with that batch.

Enter the quantity to pick. The picked quantity can exceed the quantity in the production order, but is limited by the available quantity on the logistic unit or pick location. For more information about quantity entering methods see: 4.3.4. Screens for entering additional information

5.1.1.7. Select destination location

After the product has been identified, scan the destination location or select it after pressing the ‘Select location’ button. Only the default location can be selected as the destination location. The default location is the input location of the production line. When a pick to location is set for the production line, it is the default location.
To continue the picking, press the ‘Continue picking’ button. The system will go back to the ‘Select product to pick’ screen. The button is only displayed when there are still components to pick.
When all the components have been picked, and the destination location has been identified, the system shows the ‘There are no more items to pick’ message.
After the picked items have been moved to the destination location, the system generates a ‘Move’ document in the Produmex office module to register the movement.
When the Picking for production: (After picking 401) print event is set in the Organizational Structure, the system asks whether to print the pick list for production. Press the ‘Yes’ button to print the pick list.

Select destination location

5.1.1.8. Cancellation

To cancel the picking, press the left arrow button. When nothing was picked, the system will go back to the ‘Select a task’ screen.
In case of picking onto a moveable location, the system will ask for identifying the destination location for the already picked products.
In case of picking without a moveable location, the system will ask for confirmation. To cancel the process, press ‘Yes’. The list of the picked items will be cleared. To proceed with the already picked items press ‘No’.

Cancellation

5.1.1. Unpick
5.1.2.1. Select a production order

Select a production order from the list. Every production order with at least one picked component is displayed in the list, regardless of the flow the picking was performed.

Select a production order

5.1.2.2. Identify SSCC

Scan the SSCC. To select the SSCC from a list, press the ‘No SSCC’ button. Only SSCC’s stored on the pick location of the assigned production line can be scanned or selected.
When there is no SSCC present, press the ‘No SSCC’ button. On the next screen press again the ‘No SSCC’ button.

Identify SSCC

After an SSCC was identified, scan the GS1 label or press the ’Done’ button to proceed with the unpicking.

5.1.2.3. Identify product

When unpicking only a partial logistic unit, identify the product. Scan the product or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select a product’ button. Every item that can be found on the pick to or input location will be listed, but only items linked to the production order can be scanned or selected.
When the item is managed by batches and there are more than one batch on the logistic unit or pick location, select the batch as well.

Identify product

After a product has been identified, the system goes back to the ‘Scan an SSCC’ screen. An extra ‘Book move’ button is displayed. Press this button to finish the unpicking.

Identify product

5.1.2.4. Identify destination location

Identify destination location After the ‘Book move’ button was pressed, identify the destination location.

A default location is displayed on the screen.

When the location suggestion is enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the first suggested location calculated based on the logic described in Location suggestions.

When the location suggestion is not enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the standard location set for the given warehouse on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data of the item. If the items to move have different standard location set for the warehouse, no default location is displayed.

Scan an SSCC to unpick the product to that SSCC. If the scanned SSCC is not in stock, identify the destination location on the next screen.

Scan a location to unpick the products to that location or press the ‘Select other location’ to select it from a list.

Press the ‘New SSCC’ button to unpick to a new SSCC. On the next screen scan a location or select it from a list after pressing the ‘Select other location’ button.

After the unpicked items have been moved to the selected location, the system generates a ‘Move’ document in the Produmex office module to register the movement.

After a component was unpicked, it can be picked again with the ‘Normal picking for production’ flow.

5.1.2.5. Cancellation

To cancel the unpicking, press the left arrow button. When there are already unpicked products the system will ask whether to process with the unpick or not. Press the ‘Process unpick’ button to book the unpick. Press the ‘Cancel unpick’ button to clear the list of unpicked products.

Cancellation

5.2. Pick list for production
5.2.1. Office

Before picking with the ‘Pick list for production’ flow, create a pick list in the office environment.
On the production order click on the ‘Create pick list proposal’ button. The button is only displayed if the ‘Create proposal for picking’ option is set to true in the Picking for production controller. A pick list proposal will be generated and the stock to be picked will be locked. It is only possible to create a pick list proposal for a production order with an assigned production line.
It is also possible to create pick lists for production via the Pick list proposal manager.
Then click on the ‘Gen. pick list’ button on the pick list proposal window to create the pick list. It is only possible to generate a pick list for released production orders.

Production picking flow

Pick list for productionSelect a pick listSelect an itemIdentify moveable locationIdentify the SSCC or pick locationSelect batchOther tasksEnter quantityPicked pallet
5.2.2. Shopfloor
5.2.2.1. Initiate the flow

To initiate the flow, press the ‘Pick list for production’ button on the scanner.

5.2.2.2. Select a pick list

Select a pick list from the list. Only active pick lists for a production order will be displayed. The following information is shown on the list:

  1. Production order number
  2. Destination location of the picking. Depending on the settings of the production line, the destination location is the input location or the pick to location of the production line.

Select a pick list

5.2.2.3. Select an item

Select a pick list line to pick. Press the right arrow button to proceed.

Select an item

5.2.2.4. Identify moveable location

Press the ‘No moveable location’ button to pick the components directly to the destination location. During this flow it is not recommended to pick onto a moveable location.

5.2.2.5. Identify the SSCC or pick location

Scan the SSCC or the pick location. To select the pick location from a list, press the ‘Select location’ button.

  1. Pick location
  2. Quantity to pick from the item
  3. Item to pick
  4. Storage logistic unit
  5. Total quantity of the pick list

Identify the SSCC or pick location

5.2.2.6. Select batch

When the item is managed by batches and there are more than one batch on the logistic unit or pick location, select the batch as well. Only the batch defined in the pick list can be selected.

Select batch

5.2.2.7. Other tasks

Press the ‘Other task’ button to reach the following tasks:

  • Alternate stock
  • Skip item

Press the ‘Alternate stock’ button to select alternate stock. On the next screen select the alternate stock from the list. After the alternate stock has been selected, identify it as described above.
Press the ‘Skip item’ button to skip the item. The system will go back to the ‘Items still to pick’ screen. (5.2.2.3.)

Other tasks

5.2.2.8. Enter quantity

After the SSCC or pick location was identified, enter the quantity to pick. The picked quantity cannot exceed the quantity in the pick list.

5.2.2.9. Picked pallet

After the quantity has been added, the locking is removed for the product. The product is moved to the destination location. The movement is registered in the Produmex office module in a ‘Move’ document. Proceed with the next line of the pick list. After every component has been picked, the system displays information about the picked pallet.

  1. Name of the production line
  2. SSCC of the new logistic unit

Note:

  • NEW If the full quantity of the selected item is picked and the 204 - Picking: after item is picked print event is set for the pick list type on the Print Events tab of the Organizational Structure, the system asks if you want to print a label. To proceed with the printing click OK.
  • When the ‘Picking for production: new LU full event (201)’ print event is set in the Organizational Structure, the print event is triggered and the logistic label is printed. The default report for this print event is the DefaultLogisticsLabel.rpt.

Picked pallet

6. Component weighing production

When the ‘Prod. Order start condition’ is set to ‘Component weighed’ for a component in the Bill of Materials , weigh the component before moving it to the production line.
Please note: This step is only for items where the weight is the primary uom.

Products picked to the Pick to location of the production line can be weighed. When the production line has no pick to location set, the components picked to the input location can be weighted.

Component weighing production flow

6.1. Initiate the flow

Press the ’Component weighing production’ button on the touchscreen.

Initiate the flow

6.2. Select a production line

Select a production line from the list. Only active production lines will be listed.

Select a production line

6.3. Select a production order

Select a production order from the list. Only released production orders that are not assigned to another production line will be displayed on the list. When there is a started production order on the production line, the system will proceed with that order automatically.
The following information is displayed on the list:

  1. Type of the production order indicated with an icon. Please note that Disassembly type production orders are not supported in this flow.
  2. Code, description and barcode of the item to produce.
  3. Number and due date of the production order.

Select a production order

6.4. Select item to weigh

On the next screen every not lined up material from the production order will be listed.
Different batches will be displayed in separate lines.
The available quantity is the quantity of the batch on the location. The completed quantity is the weighted quantity. The planned quantity is the quantity in the production order line.
The quantity will be displayed in black when the components are not yet weighted but there are enough available stock for the weighing. The quantity will be displayed in red when there are no available stock to weigh. The quantity will be displayed in green when the weighing is completed.
Select a batch and press the right arrow button to weigh the products from that batch.

Select item to weigh

6.5. Weigh product

Weigh the products. It is also possible to enter the weight manually.
The To-do quantity is the quantity that still needs to be weighed. It is calculated by {Planned quantity-Completed quantity}.
There are two indicator bars displayed on the screen. The to-do quantity is marked on both bars. When the quantity tolerance is greater than zero, the quantity tolerance range is also displayed on the indicator bars.
The weighed quantity is displayed in green on the indicator bars when the quantity is in range. The weighed quantity is displayed in yellow on the indicator bars when the quantity does not reach the minimum range of the to-do quantity. The weighed quantity is displayed in red on the indicator bars when the weighed quantity exceeds the maximum range of the to-do quantity.
Press the ‘<Tare>’ button to tare the scale.
Press the ‘<Zero>’ button to zero the scale.

In range

Less than

Exceeds

6.6. Select SSCC

Select the target SSCC for the weighed products. Press the ‘<new>’ button to move the weighed components to a new logistic unit or select an SSCC from the list and press it.

6.7. Finish weighing

Press the ‘Complete weighing’ button to register the weighing of quantities within the quantity range. When the Warehouse: new LU has been created (700) print event is set in the Organizational Structure, the system triggers prints the label. The default report for this print event is the ’DefaultLogisticsLabel.rpt’.
Press the ‘Partial (ask label)’ button to register the weighing of quantities less than the minimum quantity range. Based on the settings in the Production controller, the system might ask whether to print the label when the print event is set in the Organizational Structure.

Finish weighing

The weighed products will be moved to the input location automatically.
Press the ‘Return unweighed items’ button to move the unweighed items to the rest location. The system will ask for confirmation. Press the ‘Move’ button to move the unweighted items. Press the ‘Cancel’ button to cancel the movement.

Proceed

7. Move Components to the Production Line

You have the following options to move the picked components to the production line:

(1) If you produce with the Receipt from Production flow, the picked components can be moved to the production line with the Move to Production Line flow (see section 7.1 below).

(2) If you produce with the Production flow, you can use the Move to Production Line flow (see section 7.1 below) or you can move the components on the terminal (see 8.2.8. Move the components to the production line).

Note:

  • With default settings, components can only be moved from the input location to the production line. If the Allow to move stock to prod. line from rest location? setting is enabled on the Production controller, the components can also be moved from the rest location to the production line.
7.1. Move to Production Line flow
7.1.1. Start the flow

Tap the Move to production line button on the scanner.

Move to Production Line

7.1.2. Select a production line

Select the production line on the Select a production line screen and tap the right arrow.

 Select a production line

When there is no started production order on the selected line, the system displays the No started production order found message. Tap OK and the system goes back to the Select a production line screen.

No started production order found

7.1.3. Select a production order
  • If there is more than one started production order, the system displays the Select a production order to pick for screen.
    Select a production order, tap the right arrow and the system displays the Production information screen.
  • If there is one started production order, the Select a production order to pick for screen is skipped and the Production information screen is displayed.
  • The Production information screen displays the following information:
  1. Production order number
  2. Planned quantity
  3. The code, the description and the barcode of the item to produce
  4. The due date of the production order
  5. Remarks for the production order
  • Tap OK.

Select a production order and Production information screens

7.1.4. Select an item to move

After identifying the production order, the system lists the components from the production order on the Items to move screen. Only those components are listed that are available on the input location.

Note: Time registry items are not displayed on the list.

Next to the item code the system displays the quantity to be moved. Negative quantity means that the quantity on the production line exceeds the planned quantity.

Select an item and tap the right arrow button.

Items to move

7.1.5. Identify the SSCC to move

On the Identify the SSCC to move screen you have the following options:

  • a) scan the SSCC to move (see section (a) below),
  • b) move a partial logistic unit (see section (b) below),
  • c) go back to the Select a production line screen by tapping the Stop button or the left arrow.

Identify the SSCC to move

a) Scan the SSCC to move.

Note: Only SSCCs meeting the following conditions can be moved:

  • there are items linked to the production order on the logistic unit,
  • the logistic unit is stored on the input location of the production line.

When the SSCC is scanned and the logistic unit is moved to the production line, the system displays the Logistic unit/items are moved message. Tap OK.

The movement is registered in the Produmex office module in a Move document.

Logistic unit/items are moved

If there are other items to move, the system displays the Identify the SSCC to move screen.

If there is no more item to move, the flow is finished, and the system displays the Select a production line screen.

b) Move a partial logistic unit.

  • Tap the Partial logistic unit button.
  • On the Scan a product screen scan the product or tap the Select a product button and select the product from the displayed list.
  • Enter the number of items on the Enter the quantity screen and tap the right arrow.

Note: The moved quantity cannot exceed the available quantity on the input location, but it can exceed the planned quantity of the component on the production order.

The components are moved to the production line and the movement is registered in the Produmex office module in a Move document.

Scan a product

Enter quantity

If there are other items to move, the system goes back to the Identify the SSCC to move screen.

If there is no more item to move, the flow is finished, and the system displays the Select a production line screen.

8. Production

Produmex supports each of the three SAP B1 production order types.
Based on the significant differences between the ‘Disassembly’ type and the other two types of production orders, Produmex offers disassembly flows in addition to the production flows.
To perform ‘Standard’ and ‘Special’ type of production orders, the system offers two different production flows:

Receipt from production
The flow can be performed either on fixed terminals or on scanners. With default settings the production cannot be started on the thin client. After the production the calculated consumed quantity will be locked. Perform the material confirmation, component issues and the closing of the production order in the Production manager.

Production
The flow can only be executed on fixed terminals. The production can be started on the terminal. The consumed quantities can be modified on the terminal. After the consumed quantity has been confirmed the components are issued and an ’Issue for production’ document is created in SAP B1. In this flow, it is also possible to close the production order on the terminal.

When the ‘Main Touch Production Flow Script’ is set as the workflow for the touchscreen, the Production flow automatically starts on the touchscreen after logging in.

To perform ‘Disassembly’ type production orders, Produmex also has two disassembly flows. The main difference between the two flows is in the way of defining the disassembled quantities.

Disassembly
Enter the disassembled quantity one by one for each component.

Disassembly - weight
Add the disassembled quantities on a collective screen. It is possible to add the quantity by weighing with the linked scale.

It is also possible to perform ‘Disassembly’ type of production orders in the ‘Production’ or ‘Receipt from production flows’.

8.1. Receipt from Production
8.1.1. Select a production order

Select a production order from the list and press the right arrow button to proceed.
When using the default settings, only the production orders with ‘Started’ status are displayed in the list.
When the ‘Allow starting production order on receipt flow’ option is set to true on the Production controller, the released production orders with an assigned production line are displayed on the list too. The system will automatically change the status to ‘Started’ when proceeding with these orders.

Select a production order

On the scanner, ‘Started’ orders are indicated with an icon. ‘Standard’ and ‘Special’ type flows are indicated with the icon. ‘Disassembly’ productions are indicated with the icon.
After the production order has been selected, the system checks whether there are enough stock on the production line to produce. When there is not enough stock to produce, an error message is shown.

8.1.2. Select a task

If there is a by-product line on the production order, the Select task screen opens. This screen is automatically skipped if the production order does not contain by-products.

Identify batch

To produce the main product, press the ’Produce’ button.

To produce by-product(s), press the ’Produce by-products’ button. On the next screen select a by-product to produce from the list. Every by-product from the production order is listed.

The steps of main product and by-product production are similar. The differences are described at each given step.

Identify batch

8.1.3. Identify batch

Depending on the batch number settings for production the system might ask to enter the batchnumber, if the product is managed by batches.
Depending on the best before date settings for production, the system might ask to enter the best before date, if the product has a best before date.

Identify batch

When the product has batch attributes, the system asks for adding those attributes too.

8.1.4. Select logistic carrier and identify the SSCC

Then select the logistic carrier from the list. Every logistic carrier that has stock on the ‘Stor. Loc. logistic carriers’ location for the warehouse is listed.

Identify batch

To produce without a logistic carrier press the ‘Other tasks’ button. On the next screen select a task:

  • Press the ‘No logistic carrier’ button to produce onto a new SSCC.
  • Press the ‘Produce on existing SSCC’ button to produce onto an existing SSCC. On the next screen scan the target SSCC.

Identify batch

The system automatically proceeds to the Select a task screen and skips the Select a logistic carrier screen if there is no available logistic carrier on the ‘Stor. Loc. logistic carriers’ location or if the company does not use logistic carriers. In this case the ‘New SSCC’ button is displayed instead of the ‘No logistic carrier’ button. Press this button to produce onto a new SSCC. No logistic carrier will be linked to the produced item.

Identify batch

The system also proceeds automatically if the product has a ‘Default log. car. production’ set on the Produmex Production tab of the Item Master Data. In this case a ‘Proceed’ button is displayed instead of the ‘No logistic carrier’ button. Press this button to create a new SSCC with a linked logistic carrier.

Identify batch

8.1.5. Enter quantity

After the SSCC has been defined, add the produced quantity. By default the planned quantity is displayed, but it is possible to produce different quantities.
The maximum of the produced quantity for the main product is calculated based on the following values:

  • base quantity of the components from the production order
  • the quantity tolerance of components set in the production order
  • the available quantity on the production line

Please note: lined up components and time registration items are not taken into account when calculating the maximum quantity.

The calculation of the maximum quantity occurs in three steps:

  • First the system calculates the maximum producible quantity for each material based on only that material.
    Maximum quantity = Quantity on the production line/ (base quantity *(1-quantity tolerance))
  • Then the system selects the lowest value from the maximum producible quantities. To define the maximum quantity, the system rounds down that value to the decimal places specified for the uom in the Item Master Data of the product.

Enter quantity

The produced quantity for by-products is not limited by the available quantity of the materials on the production line.

In case of producing a catch weight item, enter the produced weight too. The maximum weight is calculated from the produced quantity, the default weight the and the weight tolerance defined in the Item Master Data of the product.
When the item to produce is managed by Produmex or ‘On release only’ type serial numbers, it is possible to add the quantity by scanning the serial numbers or by entering the quantity.
When the item to produce is managed by ‘On every transaction’ type serial numbers, the quantity can only be added by scanning the serial numbers.
For more information about quantity entering methods see: Screens for entering additional information.

Enter quantity

8.1.6. Production

After the quantity has been added, the product is produced. The system books a ‘Receipt from Production’ document and moves the product to the output location. The quality status of the received product is the quality status set as the ‘Quality status production’ on the Production tab of the Organizational Structure.

When the product is produced, the system locks the consumed stock. The locked quantity is calculated from the produced quantity and the base quantity of the component. Materials are not locked for by-products.

If set in the Organizational Structure, the ‘Production: logistic unit produced event (400)’ print event is triggered and the Production label is printed. The default report of the print event is DefaultProductionLabel.rpt.

8.1.8. Item produced

On the screen the ‘The item is produced’ message is displayed. Press ‘Ok’ to go back to the ‘Select a production order’ screen. When the ‘Proceed with current production order after entering quantity on prod. receipt flow?’ option is set to true in the Production controller, the system automatically proceeds with the current production order.

Item produced

As long as the production order is not closed, it is possible to produce more than the planned quantity.
Close the production in the Production Manager. If the ‘Automatically close production orders on completion? (Y/N)’ option is set to true in the Production controller, the production order will be automatically closed when the planned quantity for the main product has been reached. The Issue for Production documents will be booked with the planned quantities and the components will be issued.

8.2. Production flow

Production flow

8.2.1. Initiate the flow

To initiate the production flow, press the ‘Production’ button on the terminal.

Initiate the flow

8.2.2. Select production line

Select the production line where the production will take place. Press the right arrow button to proceed. Every active production line is displayed on the list.

Select production line

8.2.3. Select production order

Select a production order from a list. Released production orders that are assigned to the selected production line or that are not assigned to any line yet are displayed on the list.
When there is a started production order on the line, the system automatically proceeds with that order.

Select production order

8.2.4. Start production

After the production order has been selected, the system will display the details of the production:

  1. The code and description of the item to produce.
  2. The due date of the production order and the attached remarks.
  3. The type of the production indicated with an icon.
  4. The planned quantity.
  5. Production order number.

To start the production, press the ‘Start production’ button. When no production line was assigned to the order, it can be started at any production line. After the order has been started on a production line the system automatically assigns that line to the production order.

Start production

8.2.5. Identify batch

Depending on the batch number settings for production the system might ask to enter the batch number, if the product is managed by batches. If both the product and the by-product(s) are managed by batches, the batch number of the by-product(s) is the same as the batch number of the product.

Depending on the best before date settings for production, the system might ask to enter the best before date, if the product has a best before date. If the product and the by-product(s) have a best before date, the best before date of the by-product(s) is the same as the best before date of the product.

When the product has batch attributes, the system asks for adding those attributes too.

8.2.6. Select lined up location

When there are no components that has to be lined up, the system skips this screen.
When there is a component that has to be lined up in the production order, select the lined up location from the list. Different lined up component are displayed on separate screens. A location is listed if the following is verified:

  • The ‘Can be lined up’ option is enabled for the location
  • The location is added to the production line as a lined up location
  • A component that has to be lined up is stored on the location

When there is only one location that verifies these criteria, the system automatically proceeds with that location.
This screen can also be reached by pressing the ‘Change lined up locations’ button on production cockpit.

Select lined up location

8.2.7. Production cockpit

The next screen is the Production ‘cockpit’.

Production cockpit

  1. Code, description and barcode of the item to produce.
  2. The planned quantity.
  3. The number of the production order.
  4. The due date of the production order and the attached remarks.
  5. The type of the production order indicated with an icon.
  6. The list of components that still have to be moved to the production line. The item code, description and barcode of the components and the needed quantity is displayed.
    The following components are not listed:
    • lined up components
    • time registration components
    • optional components
  7. ‘Produce’ button. See: 8.2.9.Produce
  8. ’Produce by-products’ button. See: 8.2.10. Produce by-products
  9. ‘Change lined up locations’ button. See: 8.2.6. Select lined up location
  10. ‘Add items to use’ button. See: 8.2.8. Move components to production line
  11. ‘Print product label’ button. See: 8.2.12.Print label
  12. End production order button. See: 8.2.13. End production
  13. Clock button. Press the button to register time registration items. See: 10. Time registration
8.2.8. Move components to production line

The components can be moved either on the scanner or on the terminal. Use the ‘Move to production line’ flow to perform the move on the scanner.
Only stock from the production line’s input location can be moved to the production line. When the ‘Allow to move stock to prod. line from rest location’ option is set to true in the Production controller, stock from the rest location can be moved to the production line too.

Move components to production line

Press the ‘Add items to use’ button to perform the move on the touchscreen.
There are three possible ways to move the materials to the production line.

  • To move only one item, press the ‘Move an item‘ button. Identify the product to move.
    First scan the linked SSCC. When the product has no linked SSCC, press the ‘No SSCC’ button. On the next screen scan the product to move or select it from the list after pressing the ‘Select a product’ button. Every item on the input location is listed and can be moved.
    After the product has been identified, add the quantity. The moved quantity cannot exceed the quantity stored on the input location.
  • To move the entire stock of the components, press the ‘Move all items linked to the production order’ button. The system will move the entire stock of the items linked to the production order, regardless of the planned quantity.
  • To move everything from the input location press the ‘Move all items’ button. The system will move the entire stock from the input location, regardless of the planned quantity or the item.

When the ‘Hide all item buttons’ option is enabled in the Production controller, the system automatically proceeds with the ‘Move an item’ task after the ‘Add items to use’ button have been pressed.
When the ‘Auto move all linked items to BOM’ option is enabled in the Production controller, this step can be skipped as the components were automatically moved to the production line after initiating the flow.
After the components have been moved to the production line, the system registers the movement in a ‘Move’ document in the Produmex office module.

Move components to production line

When there are no items displayed on the ‘Items still to pick’ list, it means that all the required not lined up materials are already on the production line and are available for the production.

8.2.9. Produce

To produce the items, press the ‘Produce’ button.

Produce

After the ‘Produce’ button has been pressed, identify the SSCC to produce on. For the detailed description see: 8.1.4. Identify the SSCC
When the item to produce has batch attributes, the system will ask for adding those attributes too after the SSCC has been identified.
On the next screen enter the produced quantity.

Produce

After the SSCC has been defined, add the produced quantity. By default the planned quantity is displayed, but it is possible to produce different quantities.
The maximum of the produced quantity for the main product is calculated based on the following values:

  • base quantity of the components from the production order
  • the quantity tolerance of components set in the production order
  • the available quantity on the production line

Please note: lined up components and time registration items are not taken into account when calculating the maximum quantity.

The calculation of the maximum quantity occurs in three steps:

  • First the system calculates the maximum producible quantity for each material based on only that material.
    Maximum quantity = Quantity on the production line/ (base quantity *(1-quantity tolerance))
  • Then the system selects the lowest value from the maximum producible quantities. To define the maximum quantity, the system rounds down that value to the decimal places specified for the uom in the Item Master Data of the product.

Enter quantity

The produced quantity for by-products is not limited by the available quantity of the materials on the production line.

In case of producing a catch weight item, enter the produced weight too. The maximum weight is calculated from the produced quantity, the default weight the and the weight tolerance defined in the Item Master Data of the product.
When the item to produce is managed by Produmex or ‘On release only’ type serial numbers, it is possible to add the quantity by scanning the serial numbers or by entering the quantity.
When the item to produce is managed by ‘On every transaction’ type serial numbers, the quantity can only be added by scanning the serial numbers.
For more information about quantity entering methods see: Screens for entering additional information.

Enter quantity

8.2.10. Produce by-products

To produce by-products, press the ‘Produce by-products’ button. On the next screen select a by-product from the list. Every by-product from the production order is listed.

By-product

Then select the logistic carrier from the list. Every logistic carrier that has stock on the ‘Stor. Loc. logistic carriers’ location for the warehouse is listed.

By-product

To produce without a logistic carrier press the ‘Other tasks’ button. On the next screen select a task:

  • Press the ‘No SSCC’ button to produce without a logistic unit.
  • Press the ‘No logistic carrier’ button to produce onto a new SSCC.
  • Press the ‘Produce on existing SSCC’ button to produce onto an existing SSCC. On the next screen scan the target SSCC.

By-product

The system automatically proceeds to the Select a task screen and skips the Select a logistic carrier screen if there is no available logistic carrier on the ‘Stor. Loc. logistic carriers’ location or if the company does not use logistic carriers. In this case the ‘New SSCC’ button is displayed instead of the ‘No logistic carrier’ button. Press this button to produce onto a new SSCC. No logistic carrier will be linked to the produced item.

By-product

The system also proceeds automatically if the product/by-product has a ‘Default log. car. production’ set on the Produmex Production tab of the Item Master Data. In this case a ‘Proceed’ button is displayed instead of the ‘No logistic carrier’ button. Press this button to create a new SSCC with a linked logistic carrier.

By-product

On the next screen enter the quantity to produce. The quantity to produce is not limited by quantity of materials available on the production line. Displayed information:

  1. Production order number
  2. Item code and description
  3. Batch number of the main product/by-product
  4. Best before date of the main product/by-product
  5. Open quantity for the main product

By-product

After the by-product is produced, the system returns to the Production Cockpit.

In SAP Business One, the receipt from production document is created and the by-product is taken into stock on the output location of the production line.

8.2.11. Receive product

After the quantity has been added, the product is produced. The system moves the product to the output line and books a ‘Receipt from Production’ document.
The system issues the lined up materials and books an ‘Issue for production’ document for those components. The issued quantity is calculated as the product of the base quantity of the component and the produced quantity.

If set in the Organizational Structure, the ‘Production: logistic unit produced event (400)’ print event is triggered and the Production label is printed. Default report for the print event: DefaultProductionLabel.rpt

There is another way to print the label. On the main production screen press the ‘Print product label’ button. On the next screen add the produced quantity. The system automatically skips this screen, if there is already produced quantity. On the next screen add the number of labels to print.

8.2.13. End production

After the product was produced, the production can be continued, stopped or put on hold. This screen can also be reached by pressing the ‘End production order’ button on cockpit.

End production

To go back to the production lines without finishing the production, press the ‘Back to production lines’ button. The Produmex status of the production order will remain ‘Started’.
To go back to the production cockpit, press the left arrow button.
To put the production on hold, press the ‘Put on hold’ button. Issue for Production documents will be booked for the consumed quantities and the components will be issued but the production order will remain open.
To stop the production press the ‘Stop production’ button. Issue for Production documents will be booked for the consumed quantities and the components will be issued and the production order will be closed.
After pressing the ‘Stop production’ or the ‘Put on hold’ buttons, confirm the consumed quantities for the components.

8.2.14. Confirm the quantity to consume

The consumed quantity can be modified and confirmed on individual screens for each material. The consumed quantity of lined up materials cannot be modified or confirmed on the touchscreen. The consumed quantity of the time registration components can be added in the next step or after pressing the ‘Clock’ button on the Toolbar.
When the ‘Use waste?’ option is enabled in the Production controller, the waste quantities can be added as well.
When the ‘Skip consumption screen on flow for linked components?’ option is enabled in the Production controller, consumption screens for components that have been prepared (eg. weighted) will be skipped.

Confirm the quantity to consume

The stock on the input location is listed on the screen. The different batches are displayed in separate lines. Products stored on different SSCC’s are also displayed in separate lines.

  1. The ‘Item to consume’ is the item code and description of the component.
  2. The ‘Quantity to consume’ is the product of the produced quantity and the base quantity of the component.
  3. The ‘Difference qty to use’ is the difference of the ‘Quantity to consume’ and the ‘# Used’ quantity.
  4. The batch number, the second batch number and the best before date of the batch.
  5. The ‘# On line’ quantity is the quantity of the stock that was moved to the production line.
  6. The ‘#Used’ quantity is the quantity that was consumed for the production.
  7. The ‘#Rest’ quantity is the quantity remaining on the production line.
  8. The ‘#Waste’ quantity is the quantity of the waste.

The default ‘# Used’ quantity is calculated based on the following logic:

  • If the available quantity is greater than or equal to the quantity to consume:
    Default #Used quantity = Quantity to consume.
  • If the available quantity is less than the quantity to consume but within the quantity range:
    Default #Used quantity = Available quantity.

When the ‘Auto fill consumed quantity from prepared quantity on stop production?’ option is set to true in the Production controller, the default ‘#Used’ quantity for prepared components (eg. weighted) is the prepared quantity, if it is within the quantity range.
The ‘# Rest’ quantity is the quantity of the stock remaining on the production line. It is calculated by {‘#On line’ quantity - ‘# Used’ quantity}.
The # Used (9) and the # Rest (10) quantity of the selected batch can be modified in the respective input field. After the modification press the ‘Update’ button.
Please note: The ‘# Used quantity’ must be within the quantity range defined by the produced quantity and the components base quantity and quantity tolerance. Because the sum of the ‘# Used’ and ‘# Rest’ quantity must be equal to the on line quantity, when modifying either one of them, the other one is automatically updated.
In case of using waste, the # On line quantity is equal to with the sum of the # Used, # Rest and # Waste quantity. When modifying the used or the rest quantity, the system updates the waste (12) quantity automatically. The # waste field cannot be modified manually on the touchscreen.
When confirming the consumed quantity of a serial numbered item, add the serial numbers of the consumed products too. After the consumed quantity has been added, the system ask the method of entering the serial numbers. Select a method then on the next screen scan the serial numbers.

In case of a catch weight component, the default weights are displayed too.

  1. The weight to consume. It is calculated from quantity to consume and the weight defined in the Item Master Data.
  2. The On line, Used, Rest and Waste weight of the batch. By default it is calculated from the weight of the batch available on the production line and the quantity to consume.
  3. The On line, Used, Rest and Waste weight of the item. By default it is calculated from the weight of the item available on the production line and the quantity to consume.
  4. The used weight of the selected batch can be modified in this field.
  5. The rest weight of the selected batch can be modified in this field.
  6. The waste weight of the selected batch is displayed in this field.

Confirm the quantity to consume - catch weight

Press the right arrow button to proceed to the next component.

8.2.15. Time registration

When the production order contains time registration components, define the consumed quantity for those components as well. For more information about time registration see: 10. Time registration

Time registration

8.2.16. Issue components

Once the material consumption is confirmed, the used quantities are issued and an ‘Issue for production’ document is booked. Waste quantities are booked in a separate ‘Issue for production’ document. Time registration items are issued in a separate ‘Issue for production document’ too.
The remaining stock is moved to the rest location of the production line. The movement is registered in a Move document in the Produmex office module.

8.2.17. Production order status

When stopping the production order, the Produmex and the SAP status of the production order will be changed to ‘Closed’.
When putting the production on hold, the Produmex status on the production order will be changed to ‘On hold’, but the SAP status of the production order will remain ‘Released’. The production can be continued after a restart on the production line. The production can only be restarted on the production line where it was performed previously. It is not possible to start an ‘On hold’ production in the Production Manager.

Production order

8.3. Disassembly

Disassembly flow

8.3.1. Initiate the flow

Press the ‘Disassembly’ button on the touchscreen.

Initiate the flow

8.3.2. Select production line
8.3.3. Select the production order

Select the production order from the list. Only released disassembly orders assigned to the selected production line or not yet assigned to any line are displayed on the list.

Select the production order

8.3.4. Start production

After the order has been selected, the details of the disassembly will be displayed. Press the ‘Start production’ button to start the disassembly. For more information about the displayed production details see: 8.2.4. Start production
When there is a stared disassembly order, the system automatically proceeds with that order.

Start production

8.3.6. Disassembly cockpit

The next screen is the disassembly cockpit.

  1. Code, description and barcode of the item to produce.
  2. The planned quantity in the production order.
  3. The number of the production order.
  4. The due date of the production order and the attached remarks.
  5. The type of the production order indicated with an icon.
  6. The product to disassemble is listed here. The quantity that still need to be moved to the production line is displayed next to the item code and description.
  7. ‘Disassemble’button. See: 8.3.8. Disassemble
  8. ‘Add items to use’buton. See: 8.3.7. Move to the production line
  9. ‘Print product label’ button. See: 8.2.11. Print label
  10. ‘End production order’. See: 8.3.10. End production

Disassembly cockpit

8.3.7. Move to the production line

Add the item to disassemble to the production line. Press the ‘Add items to use’ button or move the item with the ‘Move to production line’ flow. For more information about moving the item to the production line see: 8.2.8. Move the components to the production line

Move to the production line

8.3.8. Disassemble

Add the item to disassemble to the production line. Press the ‘Add items to use’ button or move the item with the ‘Move to production line’ flow. For more information about moving the item to the production line see: 8.2.8. Move the components to the production line

 Disassemble

After the ‘Disassemble’ button has been pressed a list of components are displayed on the screen. Only components from the disassembly order will be displayed on the list. Select a component from the list.

 Disassemble

If the item is managed by batches, depending on the batch number settings for production the system might ask to enter the batch number.
If the item has a best before date, depending on the best before date settings for production, the system might ask to enter the best before date.
If the item has batch attributes, the system asks for adding those attributes too.

On the next screen identify the destination logistic unit. See: 8.1.4. Identify the SSCC
Add the quantity disassembled of the selected component. The quantity is the base quantity multiplied by the quantity of the product on the production line. The maximum quantity is calculated from the base quantity and the quantity tolerance of the component and the available quantity of the product on the production line.

 Disassemble

In the case of a catch weight component, enter the weight too. The weight range that can be added is calculated from the quantity of the component disassembled and the catch weight settings of the item.
When a component is managed by ‘On every transaction’ type serial numbers, add the quantity by scanning the serial numbers.
When a component is managed by PMX or ‘On release only’ type serial numbers, the quantity can also be added by scanning the serial numbers.
In the case of a lined up component, select the lined up location after the quantity has been added.

 Disassemble

Press the right arrow button to proceed.

8.3.9. Receive product

After the quantity has been added, the system books a ‘Receipt from production’ document for the component. If set in the Organizational Structure, the ‘Production: logistic unit produced event (400)’ print event is triggered and the Production label is printed. Default report for the print event: DefaultProductionLabel.rpt. The system displays the ‘The item is disassembled’ message.
Then the system goes back to the select a product screen. After every component has been disassembled, press the left arrow button to go back to the disassembly cockpit.

Receive product

8.3.10. End production

Press the ‘End production order’ button to quit from the disassembly. After the button has been pressed, select a task.
To go back to the production lines, press the ‘Back to production lines’ button. The Produmex status of the disassembly will remain ‘Started’.
To put the disassembly on hold, press the ‘Put on hold’ button.
To stop the production, press the ‘Stop production’ button.
After the ‘Put on hold’ or the ‘Stop production’ button has been pressed, confirm the consumed quantity.
In case the disassembled quantity of at least one item does not reach the minimum quantity calculated from the quantity of the product on the production line, the base quantity and quantity tolerance of the component and the disassembled quantity of other components, the system displays an error message. To go back to the disassembly cockpit, acknowledge the message by pressing the ‘Ok’ button.

End production

8.3.11. Confirm the consumed quantity

On the next screen, confirm the consumed quantity.

  1. Item to consume: the item code and description of the disassembled product.
  2. Quantity to consume. The quantity to consume is calculated based on the following logic:
    • First the system calculates for each component the theoretical quantity to disassemble in order to produce the previously added component quantity.
      {Quantity to disassemble = Disassembled quantity / Base quantity}
    • Then the system select the lowest value (the component linked to that value is the limiting component) and rounds it to the decimals defined for the uom in the product’s Item Master Data.
      In the case of catch weight products, the weight to consume is displayed under the quantity to consume. The weight to consume is the product of the quantity to consume and the weight defined for the item in the Item Master Data.
  3. Difference qty to use: the difference of the quantity to consume and the #used quantity.
  4. The batch number, the second batch number and the best before date of the batch. Different batches are displayed in separate lines.
  5. The ‘# On line’ quantity is the quantity of the product that was moved to the production line. In the case of catch weight products, the on line weight is also displayed.
  6. The ‘#Used’ quantity is the quantity that was consumed for the production. By default the used quantity equals to the quantity to consume. In the case of catch weight products, the used weight is also displayed. By default the used weight equals to the weight to consume.
  7. The ‘# Rest’ quantity is the quantity remaining on the production line. In the case of catch weight products, the rest weight is also displayed.
  8. The ‘# Waste’ quantity is the quantity of the waste. In the case of catch weight products, the waste weight is also displayed.

The # Used (9) and the # Rest (10) quantity of the selected batch can be modified in the respective input field. After the modification press the ‘Update’ button. In case of catch weight products, also modify the weights. After the modification press the ‘Update’ button.
In case of using waste, the # On line quantity is equal to with the sum of the # Used, # Rest and # Waste quantity. When modifying the used or the rest quantity, the system updates the waste (11) quantity automatically. The # waste field cannot be modified manually on the touchscreen.

Confirm the consumed quantity

8.3.11. Production order status
8.4. Disassembly - weight

Disassembly - weight flow

8.4.1. Initiate the flow

Press the ‘Disassembly- weight’ button on the touchscreen.

8.4.2. Select production line
8.4.3. Select production order
8.4.4. Start production order
8.4.5. Identify the batch
8.4.6. Disassembly cockpit
8.4.7. Move to production line
8.4.8. Disassemble

After adding the products, press the ‘Disassemble’ button. On the next screen identify the destination logistic unit. See: 8.1.4. Identify the SSCC

Weigh a component or enter the quantity manually. Then press the button of the component to add the weighted quantity to the system.

  • If the component is managed by batches, depending on the batch number settings for production the system might ask to enter the batch number.
  • If the component has a best before date, depending on the best before date settings for production, the system might ask to enter the best before date.
  • If the component has batch attributes, the system asks for adding those attributes too.

After the quantity has been added, the system books a ‘Receipt from production’ document and moves the component to the output location.

When added quantity exceeds the maximum quantity, the system displays an error message. The maximum quantity is calculated from the base quantity and the quantity tolerance of the component and the available quantity of the product on the line.

Proceed with the next component. After every component has been weighted, press the right arrow button to continue with the flow.

Press the ‘Logistic carrier is full’ button to continue the disassembly onto another logistic carrier. After the button has been pressed, the ‘Production: logistic unit produced event (400)’ print event is triggered and the production label is printed. The default report for the print event is DefaultProductionLabel.rpt. On the next screen identify the new destination logistic unit.

To go back to the disassembly cockpit, press the left arrow button. . After the button has been pressed, the ‘Production: logistic unit produced event (400)’ print event is triggered and the production label is printed. The default report for the print event is DefaultProductionLabel.rpt.

Disassemble

8.4.9. End production order

On the main production screen press the ‘End production order’ button.
See: 8.3.9. End production order and 8.3.10. Confirm the consumed quantity

8.4.10. Production order status

9. Finish production

Production orders can be finished in the office environment with the Production Manager. When producing with the ‘Production’ flow, the closing of the production can also be performed on the terminal.

9.1. Office

Select the production line and click on the ‘Detail’ button. The ‘Detail’ button is only active, if there is a started production order assigned to the selected production line.
The produced quantity is displayed on the screen but it cannot be modified on the Production Manager.
On the ‘Production detail’ screen click on the ‘Finish production’ button. The closing process depends on the selected production manager type for the production line.

9.1.1. Production manager type: SPL_CONS_LOCK

When the production manager type is set to SPL_CONS_LOCK for the Production Line, the system will use the stock locked during the production as the base of the consumption.
On the ‘Stop production’ window add the consumed quantities.
The lined up and not lined up components are displayed in separate sections. Different batches are displayed in separate lines. The number of the displayed rows can be limited on the Production controller. Time registrations cannot be modified on the Production manager.

Not lined up ingredients

Add the used quantity to the line of the batch it was consumed from. By default the used quantity is zero. It is also possible to define the used quantity by adding the remaining quantity. Because the sum of the ‘# Used’ and ‘# Remaining’ quantity must be equal to the ‘# On line’ quantity, when modifying either one of them, the other one is automatically updated.
The added consumed quantity cannot exceed the on line quantity.
By default the used weight is also zero. When adding the used or the remaining quantity of a catch weight item, the system automatically fills the standard weight based on the ingredient’s catch weight settings. It is possible to modify the weight within the allowed quantity tolerance defined in the Item Master Data.

When the ‘Use waste?’ option is enabled in the Production controller, the waste quantity and the waste weight can be added as well. In this case the # On line quantity equals with the sum of the # Used, # Rest and # Waste quantities. After modifying two of those fields, the system automatically updates the third one. The # waste field can only be modified if the ‘Allow waste to be editable when finishing production on production manager?’ option is set to true in the Production controller.
When there are serial numbered items among the ingredients, the serial numbers of the consumed product must be selected. Click on the serial number field in the line of ingredient managed by serial numbers. A ‘Serial Number Selection’ window will open up. Select the serial numbers of the consumed products.

Lined up ingredients

Since the used quantity of the lined up ingredients cannot be measured, define it by modifying the quantity remaining in the tank. The # used quantity cannot be changed directly. The system will calculate the used quantity by subtracting the remaining quantity from the in tank quantity before the production.

9.1.2. Production manager type: MPL_CONS_INPUT

When the production manager type is set to MPL_CONS_INPUT for the Production Line, every production order started on a production line with the same input location as the selected production line will be closed in one step. The system will use the stock on the input location as the base of the consumption.

9.1.2.1. Confirm material consumption

On the ‘Stop production’ screen started production orders assigned to production lines with the same input location are listed.
The lined up and not lined up components for the selected production order are displayed in separate sections. Different batches are displayed in separate lines. The number of the displayed rows can be limited on the Production controller. Time registrations cannot be modified on the Production manager.

Not lined up ingredients

When the production manager type is MPL_CONS_INPUT, the used quantity and weight cannot be modified.
The system will issue the entire stock located on the input location for the component. When the production orders have common materials, the system will divide the stock to issue between the production orders based on the theoretical quantities of the component.

Lined up ingredients

Since the used quantity of the lined up ingredients cannot be measured, define it by modifying the quantity remaining in the tank. The # used quantity cannot be changed directly. The system will calculate the used quantity by subtracting the remaining quantity from the in tank quantity before the production.

9.1.3. Close the production

To close the production, press the ‘Stop production’ button.
After the button has been pressed,

  • the system will remove the lock from the components
  • the used and waste quantity of the ingredients will be issued and an ‘Issue for production’ document will be created. Waste quantities are displayed in separate lines and indicated as waste in the ‘Issue for production’ document. For more information about additional Produmex production issue lines see: 3.3.4. Production issue lines.
  • the remaining quantity of the ingredients will be moved to the rest location of the production line and a ‘Move’ document will be created
  • the used quantities will be added to the ‘Issued’ field of the production order
  • both the SAP and Produmex status will be changed to ‘Closed’ on the production order

9.2. Shopfloor

For the detailed description about finishing the production on the shopfloor see:
8.2.1.2 End production 8.3.9. End production (disassembly)

10. Time registration

With the help of the time registration module it is possible to book activity costs for activities performed during the production. (E.g. setup time, working hours, downtime).

10.1. Office

Add a time registration type item to the BoM or to the production order. For more information about time registration items see: 3.1.3. Produmex Production Tab.

Add a time registration type item or resource to the BoM or to the production order.

BoM

10.2. Shopfloor

Since time registration type components are used for measuring time, there is no need to pick and move them to the production line. Therefore time registration components are not listed during the picking and moving flows.
Time registration can be used in both production flows, but it is only available on the touchscreen. It is not recommended to use the time registration during multiple step products executed with the production step list.

10.2.1. Initiate the time registration

Press the ‘Clock’ button on the toolbar to start registering time. In case of ‘Production’ flow, the button is active on the Production cockpit screen. In case of ‘Production Receipt’ flow, press the button before selecting the production order.

Initiate the time registration

10.2.2. Select a time registration item

Select a time registration item from the list. Only time registration items/resources linked to the production order are listed.

Select a time registration item

10.2.3. Select a task

Press the ‘Start’ button to start a new time registration. To go back to the production cockpit, press the left arrow button.
Press the ‘Stop’ button to finish the time registration. The button is only available if there is a started time registration. For more information please see: Select an operator
Press the ‘# Hours’ button to add the time manually. For more information please see: Enter the hours manually
Press the ‘Downtime’ button to register downtime. The button is only available if there is a started time registration. For more information please see: Registering downtime
Press the ‘Overview’ button to see the overview of the booked time registrations. For more information please see: Overview

Select a task

10.2.4. Enter the hours manually

Press the ‘# Hours’ button. The unit of measurement of the entered value will be the UoM of the time registration component. In this document we will assume that the UoM is “hours”. On the next screen add the number of hours. The number of the hours is not limited.
After the number of hours has been entered, the system asks whether to register downtime or not. Press the ‘Yes’ button to register downtime. Press the ‘No’ button to proceed without registering downtime.

Enter the hours manually

10.2.5. Registering downtime

Press the Downtime button. On the next screen select a downtime type from the list. Every downtime type set in the default forms are listed. For more information about the downtime types see: 3.2.3.13. Down time types

Registering downtime

After the downtime type has been selected, enter the number of hours.

Number of hours

The system will asks whether to register another downtime or not. Press ‘Yes’ to register another downtime. Proceed as described above. Press ‘No’ to proceed without registering another downtime.

10.2.6. Overview

Press the ‘Overview’ button. On the next screen it is possible to adjust the registered hours and the linked operator(s) of a selected time registration. It is also possible to remove a time registration entry. Select the line and press the ‘Delete’ button.

Overview

10.2.7. Stop time registration

Press the ‘Stop’ button. After the stop button has been pressed, the timer stops. The time registry item will be issued with the measured time.

10.2.8. Select an operator

After the time registration has been stopped or the number of hours has been entered, the system asks for the operator. Select the operator(s) from the list then proceed with the right arrow button.
Employees set in SAP B1 can be selected as operators. It is possible to select multiple operators for one time registration entry.

Select an operator

10.2.9. Issuing the time registration items

After the production is finished, time registration components are booked with the reported quantities on a separate Issue for Production document.

The measured quantity is also booked as consumed capacity for the resource on the given day. It is possible to exceed the daily implementation capacity.

Please note: The production order cannot be closed if there is no sufficient stock for the time registration item.

The time registration results are stored in the PMX_TRHE table.

11. Multiple step productions with the production order step list

With the production order step list, it is possible to group multiple step productions into one production order. Execute step list productions in the ‘Production’ flow only.
With multiple step production, the production of the intermediate product(s) and the end products can be grouped together. Produmex also supports the scenario where the intermediate product is the result of a disassembly production. Execute step list productions in the ‘Production’ flow only.

11.1. Create step list

Open the Production order step list. The step list can be opened from the Produmex Production module.
Add the end product to the ‘Item to produce’ field.
Add a description to the ‘Description’ field.
Press the ‘Add line’ button to add a new line. Select a component on the line. Set the ‘Is Disassembly?’ option to true if the added item needs to be disassembled in order to produce the intermediate product.
Add the end product to the list too.
Pres the ’Add’ button to create the step list.

Create step list

Create step list

11.2. Create production order

Create a new production order. Set the type of the order as ‘Special’ (1).
Select the end product as the item to produce (2). In the next field (3) select the step list from the dropdown menu. Only step list for the item to produce will be displayed.
For more information about the production order settings for using the step list see: 3.3.2. Production order header.

Create production order

After the step list has been selected, the system automatically fills the production order lines with data copied from the BOM of the items added to the production step list (4).
In case of intermediate product is the result of a disassembly, the product to disassemble is added to the production order as a component (5).
The intermediate product(s) are also added to the production order, but as an optional item (6).
The production order lines cannot be modified on step list orders.

11.3. Execute the production

Execute the production as described in the Production Guide.
After pressing the ’Produce’ button, add the produced quantity of the end product. The produced quantity of the intermediate product can be added after the ’stop production’ or the ’Put on hold’ button has been pressed.

11.4. End production

To end the production, press the ‘End production’ button. On the next screen select a task.
Press the ‘Back to production lines’ button to go back to the production lines.
Press the ‘Put on hold’ button to put the production on hold. Press the ‘Stop production’ button to stop the production. After pressing the ‘Stop production’ or the ‘Put on hold’ buttons, confirm the produced and the consumed quantities.

11.5. Enter the quantity of the produced intermediate item

Enter the quantity of the produced intermediate item. There is no limit to the entered quantity, but the system will display an error message if while confirming the consumed quantities and there is an insufficient stock on the production line.

Enter the quantity of the produced intermediate item

11.6. Enter the quantity to consume for the optional item

Enter the consumed quantity of the optional item. The entered quantity cannot exceed the quantity available on the production line.

Enter the quantity to consume for the optional item

When the end product was not produced, the system skips this screen. When the consumed quantity is greater than zero, then confirm the consumed quantity on the next screen. For more information about the consumed quantity confirmation screens see: 8.2.13. Confirm the quantity to consume.

11.7. Confirm the quantity to consume for the components

For more information about the consumed quantity confirmation screen see: 8.2.13. Confirm the quantity to consume.
In case of step list productions, the quantity to consume of a component is the sum of the calculated quantity to consume for the intermediate and the end product.
After the consumed quantities have been confirmed, the system issues the used quantities and books an ‘Issue for production’ document. The rest quantities are moved to the rest location and the movement is registered in a Move document in the Produmex office module.

Confirm the quantity to consume for the components

11.8. Add the quantity of the output item to process

First enter the output quantity of the end product. The maximum quantity is the produced quantity of the end product.
These screens are used to verify the produced quantity. The entered quantity cannot exceed the produced quantity.
First confirm the produced quantity of the end product by entering the output quantity. On the next screen add the output quantity of the intermediate product.

Add the quantity of the output item to process

11.9. Issue components/ Receive product

After the consumed quantities have been added, the system issues the components with the confirmed quantity and books an ’Issue for production’ document.
The remaining stock is moved to the production line, and the movement is registered in a Move document in the Produmex office module.
The produced intermediate product is moved to the output of the production line.
The system either closes or puts on hold the production order, depending on which button was pressed in the 11.4. End production step.

15.2.12. Put away – Production

The Put away for production generator controls the creation of the put away orders. When the standard Produmex WMS product is used, a put away order is created after the (by-) product is produced onto a logistic unit. No production put away order is generated when producing without an SSCC.

To start the flow, select the Put away option from the Production main menu.

15.2.12.1. Select the source location

Every location that set as an output location of a production line is listed from the warehouses assigned to the thin client.

15.2.12.2. Scan an SSCC

On the next screen every SSCC that belongs to an open production put away order for the location is listed. Scan the SSCC to move.

15.2.12.3. Scan destination location

Then scan the destination location. It is also possible to select the destination location from a list.

  • Press the ‘Select location’ button to see the list of active locations in the warehouse of the selected output location.
  • Press the ‘Select empty location’ button to see the list of every empty active location from the warehouse of the selected output location.

On the bottom of the screen the Default location is displayed.

When the location suggestion is enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the first suggested location calculated based on the logic described in Location suggestions.

When the location suggestion is not enabled for the warehouse, the Default location is the standard location set for the given warehouse on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data of the item. If the items to move have different standard location set for the warehouse, no default location is displayed.

15.2.12.4. Logistic unit is moved

After the destination location is selected, the SSCC is moved to that location. The ‘Logistic unit/Items are moved’ message is displayed on the scanner. Press ‘OK’ to acknowledge the message. The system returns to the ‘Scan an SSCC’ screen.

16. Returnable items

Returnable items, such as logistic carriers and reusable packaging, require a special information processing in order to maintain the inventory correctly and to handle the deposit that has to be charged for it.

Produmex Logistic provides a special procedure to manage returnable items. With the help of this procedure double bookings can be avoided and the returnable item(s) will be added automatically to the receipt/ delivery document, when adding an item that contains returnable items.

16.1. Company settings

1.1. Adjust how to handle returnable items

Configure the booking of the returnable items on the Business Partner Master Data and on the ‘General’ tab of the Organizational Structure. For more information please see:

Please note: When using perpetual inventory, only inventory returnable items will be added to the documents.

Company settings

16.1.2. Quality status of a returnable item

Specify the quality status of a returnable item on the ‘Defaults’ tab. For more information see: 5.1.2. Defaults

16.1.3. Storage location of the inventory returnable items

Define the storage location for the warehouse where the inventory returnable items will be stored. For more information see: 5.2.1. Warehouse settings

16.2. Create returnable items

To ensure the accuracy of the inventory of the returnable items and to enable the traceability, create two variants of the returnable item: a non-inventory returnable item and an inventory returnable item.

Because returnable items play an important role in the packaging, receiving and shipping process of goods, companies that use returnable items have to make sure that they always have sufficient stock of returnable items. Therefore returnable items have to be treated as inventory items.

However during the administrative goods receipt and the sales and delivery of these trade items it is necessary to mention and charge the returnable items on receipt and delivery notes and invoices, but it has to be avoided that the inventory of returnable items is increased or decreased incorrectly (double booking). For this purpose use the non-inventory returnable item.

First create the non-inventory returnable item. For more information about the settings of the Produmex Item Master Data tabs, please see: Produmex Inventory Tab
Please note: Even though using inventory returnable items for the documents, non-inventory items have to be created.

Non inventory item

Then create the inventory returnable item. Link the returnable items by adding the code of the non-inventory returnable item to the “Non inventory returnable item code” field.

Inventory item

16.3. Define BoM

Returnable items are no commercial trade items by themselves, but are the part of a trade item as the container/packaging. To establish a link between the trade item and the returnable item, create a ‘Production’ type Bill of Materials for the trade item.
A trade item can contain several returnable items.

Bill of Materials

In the example our trade item is the “Beer 0.33” which consist of 0.33L “Beer” and a “Bottle”. The “Bottle” is an inventory returnable item.

16.4. Trade process

Create the purchse/sales order for the trade item only. When purchasing/selling a trade item that contains returnable items, the system will automatically add the returnable item(s) to the receipt/delivery document. Depending on the used accounting system and the company level settings of the Organizational Structure, the added returnable item can be an inventory and a non-inventory item.

An extra, “Ret.ItemsPrice” column is added to the grid. In this column the price of all returnable item for a single trade item will be displayed.

16.4.1. Purchase

Purchase order

When the added returnable item is an inventory item, the inventory returnable item will be added to the storage location defined for returnable items after a purchase.

Inventory report

16.4.2. Sales

Sales order

When the added returnable item is an inventory item, the user do not have to pick the inventory returnable items, but a delivery note can only be created when there is sufficient stock from the inventory returnable item.

17. Stock allocation algorithm

17.1. Inventory lock

The locking function is used to reserve stock for specific documents/processes. Stock transactions on locked stocks that would modify one of the parameters defined in the lock are not allowed.

Produmex uses multiple levels of locks:

  • Item/ Quality status: The item, the warehouse and the quality status is defined for the lock.
  • Batch: The item, the warehouse, the quality status and the BatchID is defined for the lock.
  • LUID: The item, the warehouse, the quality status, the BatchID and the LUID is defined for the lock.
  • Detail: The item, the warehouse, the quality status, the BatchID the LUID and the location code is defined for the lock.

Locks can be user created or system generated.
System locks will be generated in the following processes:

  • adding a batch to a sales order: ‘Batch’ locking
  • pick list proposal generated: ‘Batch’ or ‘LUID’ locking, based on the ‘Stock order by’ setting on the Pick list proposal generator
  • pick list generated: ‘Batch’ or ‘LUID’ level locking, based on the pick list proposal
  • pick list status converted to ‘Ready’ in normal picking: ‘Detail’ level locking
  • after an item has been picked in ad hoc picking: ‘Detail’ level locking
  • Receipt from production flow: ‘Detail’ locking for ingredients to be used

Please note: When the ‘Do not lock stock on picking’ option is flagged on the General settings tab, no lock will be created for pick list proposals and pick lists.

The stock locked by the user can be linked to a customer or a base document.
There are several ways to create inventory locks manually:

  • On the PMX inventory report
    It is possible to create batch or LUID level locking, linked to the customer or the base document on the Inventory report. Click on Locking>Add. On the opening screen select the locking level and the customer, then add the quantity to lock. Select the sales order or sales invoice if needed. Please note: when creating a locking linked to the sales order/invoice, the locked quantity cannot exceed the ordered quantity.
  • Locking in advance: After the reception a LUID level locking will be created for the customer. Please note: Only products with a quality status that can be shipped will be locked.
Locking level
Item/Quality status Batch LUID Detail
System generated
Sales order Linked to the base document
Pick list proposal Linked to the base document Linked to the base document
Pick list ‘Not Ready’ Linked to the base document Linked to the base document
Pick list ‘Ready’ in normal picking Linked to the base document
Item picked in Ad hoc picking Linked to the base document
Receipt from Production Linked to the base document
User created
PMX inventory report Linked to the customer or the base document Linked to the customer or the base document
Stock allocation screen Linked to the customer or the base document Linked to the customer or the base document
Locking in advance Linked to the customer

Existing locks can be seen on the PMX inventory report. Select a line, then click on Locking > View. On the opening ‘Locked quantity’ screen every lock for the item on the selected line will be listed.

17.2. Pick list proposal

Pick list proposals can be created for the following documents:

Picklist proposal

When creating a pick list proposal, the system performs the following logic to allocate stock:
1. Get locked stock linked to the base document
If there is locked stock linked to the base document, the system will propose that stock.

2. Get locked stock linked to the customer
If there are no locked stock linked to the base document or the quantity of the locked stock is not sufficient, then the system will check if there are locked stock linked to the customer.
When there is stock locked for the customer, the system will propose that stock. If the quantity of the locked stock exceeds the ordered quantity, the system will sort the locked stock based on the option selected as ‘Stock order by’ and will allocate the stock from the first line.

3. Get the list of free stock
If there is no locked stock linked to the customer or the quantity of the locked stock is not sufficient, then the system will filter the free stock to create the list of the stock that are allowed to be picked.

A stock will be listed if the following verifies:

  • The stock is located in the selected warehouse
  • The stock is not locked for other customer or base document
  • Quality status can be picked and shipped
  • Not expired stock
  • Stock within external shelf life
  • If there are batch attributes selected on the sales order, then only batches with matching batch attributes will be listed

Stock located on:

  • Locations where the ‘Block stock from being used for the picking process’ option is enabled will not be taken into account.

After the list of the stock that is available for picking has been created, the system sorts it based on the ‘Stock order by’ setting on the Pick list proposal generator. No pick list proposal will be created if there is no available stock.
When the pick list proposal is generated, the proposed stock will be locked except if the ‘Do not lock stock on picking (pick lists can be created even if no stock is available)’ option is set to true on the on General settings. The level of the locking depends on the selected ‘Stock order by’ setting.
When the proposal line is using stock that was locked for a sales order or customer, this locking is removed and replaced by a locking linked to the proposal line. The level of the locking will be kept regardless of the ‘Stock order by’ setting.

If the ’Show pick list proposal info screen on incomplete proposal?’ option is enabled on the Pick List Proposal generator, an additional screen will open when creating pick list proposal but the total ordered quantity could not be allocated for the pick list proposal.

Pick List Proposal Info

Multiple pick list proposals

Multiple pick list proposals will be created for a single document in the following scenarios:

  • The sales order/sales invoice lines have different Shipping type. The following shipping type settings are taken into account for splitting document lines into several proposals:
    • Automatic shipping?
    • Automatic invoicing?
    • Is customer coming to collect?
  • The document lines have different warehouses assigned.
  • The document lines have different Ship-to Names assigned.
  • For the Produmex pick list type of the sales order/sales invoice the ‘Split PL on item pick type?’ and/or the ‘Split PL on item pick type 2?’ option is set to ‘Yes’ and there are items on the sales order that has different ‘Pick type’/’Pick type 2’ set on the Produmex Sales tab of the Item Master Data.
  • The number of the pallets linked to the pick list proposal is higher than the ’Number of pallets’ defined for the Produmex pick list type of the sales order/sales invoice. The number of pallets linked to the pick list proposal is calculated based on the ‘Default quantity on logistical unit’ value that was specified on the Produmex Inventory tab of the Item Master Data of the item and the ordered quantity. If there is not enough stock to fulfill the proposal, the number of pallets will be calculated based on the free quantity that can be allocated for the proposal.

    EXAMPLE:
    The default quantity on a logistic unit is 10 pcs for Item A and 20pcs for Item B. The number of the pallets for the pick list type is 5.

    Sales order 1:
    Item A: 30pcs = 3 x 10pcs = 3 pallets
    Item B: 20pcs = 1 x 20pcs = 1 pallet
    3 + 1 = 4 < 5 → 1 pick list proposal
    Because the total number of pallets needed to fulfill the order is less than the number of pallets allowed on a pick list proposal, only one pick list proposal is created.

    Sales order 2:
    Item A: 60 pcs = 6 x 10pcs = 6 pallets
    Item B: 105 pcs = 5.25 x 20pcs = 5.25 pallets
    6 + 5.25 = 11.25 > 5 → 3 pick list proposals
    Because the total number of pallets needed to fulfill the order is greater than the number of pallets allowed on the pick list proposal, the pick list proposal is split.
    1. The first proposal is created for 5 pallets of Item A, which is 50pcs.
    2. The second proposal is created for the remaining 1 pallet of Item A and 4 pallets of Item B, which is 10pcs of Item A and 80pcs of Item B.
    3. The third proposal is created for the remaining 2 pallets of Item B, which is 25pcs.

    Sales order 3:
    Item A: 5 pcs
    Item B: 84 pcs
    Item A: 3 pcs
    The system groups the lines of Item A:
    Item A: 5pcs + 3pcs = 8pcs = 0.8 pallet
    Item B: 84 pcs = 4.2x 20pcs = 4.2 pallets
    4.2+0.8 = 5 → 1 pick list proposal
    Because the total number of pallets needed to fulfill the order equals to the number of pallets allowed on a pick list proposal, the pick list proposal is not split and only one pick list proposal is created.

17.3. Pick list

The pick list will use the stock details of the proposal it was created from. When the proposal has a batch linked to it, only that batch can be allocated on the pick list. When the proposal has a LUID linked to it, then only that LUID can be allocated on the pick lists.
The locks created for the proposal will be converted to locks for the pick list without changing the locking level.

When the ‘Only pick items on location on same or lower level as dock?’ option is flagged on the Picklist controller, system will check whether there is stock from the proposed batch on the same or lower level location as the destination location (loading dock/input location of the production line). If there is not, no pick list will be generated and the pick list proposal will be closed.

Multiple pick lists

Multiple pick lists will be created for a single document in the following scenarios:

  • Multiple pick list proposals were generated (Please see: Picklist proposal)
  • Proposals were created on different times and the pick list was created before creating the next proposal.

If the document already has a pick list, a new pick list proposal can only be generated when the following verifies:

  • there is at least one document line where the quantity allocated on the existing pick list is less than the ordered quantity
  • there is available stock that can be allocated

Example:
Sales order: ItemA 10 pcs ItemB 10 pcs
The available stock that can be allocated: ItemA 10 pcs ItemB 0pcs

  1. Create pick list proposal:
    Pick list proposal (1) allocates: ItemA 10 pcs
  2. Create pick list:
    Pick list proposal (1) linked to Pick list (1)
    Pick list (1): allocates: ItemA 10 pcs
  3. Create pick list proposal after ItemB with 10 pcs became available:
    Pick list proposal (2) allocates: ItemB 10 pcs (as ItemA is already allocated, it will not be proposed)
  4. Create pick list:
    Pick list proposal (2) linked to Pick list (2)
    Pick list (2): allocates: ItemB 10 pcs

Please note: If the ‘Force all ingredients to be on a proposal before creating a pick list?’ option is set to true on the Picking for production controller, the pick list will be created for a production order only when the total quantity of every material is allocated on the pick list.

17.4. Initiate the picking

Pick list

17.4.1. Picking/ Multi-picking/ Zone-picking

After the pick list has been printed or it has been selected on the scanner, the system will select the location to pick from based on the following checks:

  • Only locations in the selected warehouse are taken into account
  • There is stock of the proposed batch on the location
  • Depending on the settings of the Pick list controller, bulk locations might be taken into account:
    • If the option ‘Can the user pick full pallet from bulk location?’ is flagged and there is a full pallet on the bulk location.
    • If the ‘Must the user first pick full pallet from bulk location?’ option is also flagged, the full pallet on the bulk location will be allocated.
    • If the ‘Can the user pick bulk quantity from bulk location?’ option is set to true, the user can pick bulk quantities from bulk locations.

Stock on the locations that are allowed for picking will be sorted based on the ‘Stock order by’ setting on the Pick list controller, unless the ‘Force the user pick full pallet?’ option is set to true. In this case the user will be forced to pick the full pallet of items which contains the same or a lower quantity than the quantity that has to be picked. If there are still quantity to pick for the item and there are no more full pallets left, then the stock will be allocated based on the ‘Stock order by’ setting.

If there is stock from the proposed batch/LUID on a location from what the user can pick, the status of the pick list will be changed to ‘Ready’. The locks for the pick list will be converted to ‘Detail’ level.

If the 'Picking: Make pick list ready for selected line? (Y/N)' option is enabled on the pick list controller, and the user performs the picking in the Picking flow, then the status of the pick list is changed to ‘Partially Ready’ after an item is selected to pick. Only the corresponding pick list line’ s status is set to ‘Ready’, the other, unpicked lines remain in ‘Not Ready’ status.

If there is no stock of the proposed batch/LUID located on a location from the user can pick , then the status of the pick list will remain ‘Not ready’ and the locks will remain on the batch/LUID level. The user have to select alternate stock on the scanner. Every batch that is allowed to be picked will be listed on the scanner as alternate stock.

After a pick list line has been picked, the locking will be converted to ‘Detail’ level. The status of the line will be changed to ‘Picked’ or ‘Packed’. (based on the pick list type and the picking process.)
If the ‘Always status picked’ option is ticked for the pick list type, the line status will be converted to ‘Picked’ regardless of the picking process. If it is disabled, then the status will be changed to ‘Picked’ when picking onto a moveable location or ‘Packed’ when picking without a moveable location.

17.4.2. Ad hoc picking

The status of the pick list will remain ‘Not Ready’ and the locking level will remain ‘Batch’ or ‘LUID’ after the pick list has been printed or selected on the scanner. The stock that can be picked will always be sorted by:

  • BBD
  • Batch with smallest free stock
  • Pick locations
  • Location with most LUID’s
  • Non-full pallets
  • Smallest quantities per inventory line
  • Location sequence

Please note that bulk locations are only taken into account if the ‘Allow ad hoc picking from bulk locations?’ option is set to true on the Pick list controller.

After a pick list line has been picked, the locking will be converted to ‘Detail’ level. The status of the line will be changed to ‘Picked’ or ‘Packed’ depending on the pick list type and the picking process.

18. Produmex Standard EDI Module

EDI is a communication protocol for electronic data interchange between business partners.

With the Produmex EDI module it is possible to:

  • export files with the Notification Listener or the Interfacing tool,
  • import files with the Interfacing tool and
  • monitor the process on the Interface Monitor screen.

The standard file formats used for EDI messages are .xml and .csv.

18.1. Configuration

18.1.1. Define the path

Define the input and the output path for the EDI module on the Config tab of the Organization Structure.

  1. In the Interface Monitor Input Archive Path field define the path where the system moves the file after processing it.
  2. In the Interface Monitor Input Error Path field define the path where the file is moved if there is an error during the processing.
  3. In the Interface Monitor Input Path field define the path to a folder from where the system imports the file.
  4. In the Interface Monitor Output Archive Path field define the path where the third party software puts the file after processing it.
    Note: This path is not used by the Produmex Interfacing tool.
  5. In the Interface Monitor Output Error Path field define the path where the third party software puts the file if there is an error while processing it.
    Note: This path is not used by the Produmex Interfacing tool.
  6. In the Interface Monitor Output Path field define the path to the folder where the system exports the file. Set this folder as an input for the third party software.

Configuration

18.1.2. Set up the interfacing controller

Produmex offers standard controllers for the following documents:

DocumentPropertyExtension
PMX advance shipping noticeInterface for PMX Advance Shipping Notice (Im-Exporter)IPmx Advance Shipping Notice Interface
PMX move orderInterface for PMX Move Order Im-/ExportIPmx Move Order Interface
PMX move Interface for PMX Move Im-/ExportIPmx Move Interface
SBO item master data Interface for SBO Item Master Data Im-/ExportISBO Item Master Data Interface
SBO purchase credit note Interface for SBO Purchase Credit Note Im-/ExportISBO Purchase Credit Note Interface
SBO purchase delivery Interface for SBO Purchase Delivery Im-/ExportISBO Purchase Delivery Interface
SBO purchase invoice Interface for SBO Purchase Invoice Im-/ExportISBO Purchase Invoice Interface
SBO purchase order Interface for SBO Purchase Order Im-/ExportISBO Purchase Order Interface
SBO purchase return Interface for SBO Purchase Return Im-/ExportISBO Purchase Return Interface
SBO sales credit note Interface for SBO Sales Credit Note Im-/ExportISBO Sales Credit Note Interface
SBO sales delivery Interface for SBO Sales Delivery Note Im-/ExportISBO Sales Delivery Interface
SBO sales invoice Interface for SBO Sales Invoice Im-/ExportISBO Sales Invoice Interface
SBO sales return Interface for SBO Sales Return Im-/ExportISBO Sales Return Interface
SBO sales orderInterface for SBO Sales Order Im-/ExportISBO Sales Order Interface

The following documents have an interface, but they require custom controllers:

DocumentProperty
PMX picklistInterface for PMX Pick List Im-/Export
PMX serial numberInterface for PMX Serial Number Im-/Export
PMX stock QS changeInterface for PMX Stock QS Change Import
PMX stock IPmx Stock Interface – Pmx Stock Im-/Exporter
SBO business partnerInterface for SBO Business Partner Im-/Exporter
SBO goods issueInterface for SBO Goods Issue Im-/Exporter
SBO goods receiptInterface for SBO Goods Receipt Im-/Export
SBO incoming paymentInterface for SBO Incoming Payment Im-/Export
SBO production issueInterface for SBO Production Issue Im-/Export
SBO production receiptInterface for SBO Production Receipt Im-/Export
SBO sales delivery 2Interface for SBO Sales Delivery 2 Im-/Export
SBO sales return 2Interface for SBO Sales Return 2 Im-/Export
SBO whs transferInterface for SBO Sales Order Im-/Export

Configuration steps:
1. Select the controller for the necessary document type on the Extension Parameters tab of the Organization Structure.
2. Select the Property and the Extension.
3. Click OK.

Extension Parameters

18.2. Exporting with the Notification Listener tool

The Notification Listener is a tool that monitors the record in the PMX_NOTQ table and performs custom actions when a certain type of data is adjusted. For information on the installation of the Notification Listener see:

To export documents proceed as follows:

1. Locate the configuration file of the Notification Listener tool.

The configuration file is called Produmex.Foundation.SboNotification.ServiceHost.exe.config and it is located in the installation folder of the tool, for example: C:\Program Files(x86)\Produmex\Produmex SB1 Notification Listener.

2. Open the file with a text editor (e.g. Notepad).

3. Locate the line of the transaction and uncomment it.

Example: Proof of delivery route export action defined for the Notification Listener

Notification Listener

4. Save the file.

5. Run the Notification Listener tool.

  • To run the Notification Listener tool in the background, start it from Windows\Control Panel\ Programs and Features\.
  • To run the Notification Listener tool with an open console, launch the RunConsole.bat file from the installation folder of the tool, for example: C:\Program Files(x86)\Produmex\Produmex SB1 Notification Listener\.

18.2.1. Example: exported XML file structure of a sales order

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<Document>
<DocumentHeader>
	<ObjectType>17</ObjectType>
		<DocumentNumber>15</DocumentNumber>
		<DocumentDate>20120220</DocumentDate>
		<DocumentDueDate>20120220</DocumentDueDate>
		<NumAtCard>7927</NumAtCard>
		<CardCode>C1000</CardCode>
		<CardName>Card name</CardName>
		<BillTo>
			<Street>Lenteakker3</Street>
			<City>SPIJKENISSE</City>
			<ZipCode>3206TB</ZipCode>
			<CountryCode>NL</CountryCode>
			<GLN>5400150100004</GLN>
			<FederalTaxID/>
		</BillTo>
		<ShipTo>
			<Street>Lenteakker 3</Street>
			<City>SPIJKENISSE</City>
			<ZipCode>3206TB</ZipCode>
			<CountryCode>NL</CountryCode>
			<GLN>5400150100004</GLN>
			<FederalTaxID/>
		</ShipTo>
		<DocumentCurrency>EUR</DocumentCurrency>
		<TotalNetto>0</TotalNetto>
		<TotalDiscount>0</TotalDiscount>
		<TotalVAT>0</TotalVAT>
		<TotalBruto>0</TotalBruto>
		<Comments>Comment</Comments>
		<GLN/>
		<FederalTaxID>US25-987634</FederalTaxID>
	</DocumentHeader>
	<DocumentLineList>
		<DocumentLine>
			<BaseDocNum>215</BaseDocNum>
			<BaseLine>0</BaseLine>
			<BaseType>22</BaseType>
			<LineNumber>0</LineNumber>
			<ItemCode>CIA00092</ItemCode>
			<ItemDescription>CIMZIA 200MG/ML 2PFS AT/NL</ItemDescription>
			<Uom>Pcs</Uom>
			<Quantity>1</Quantity>
			<UnitPrice>0</UnitPrice>
			<DiscountPercent>0</DiscountPercent>
			<LineTotal>0</LineTotal>
			<VATCode>6</VATCode>
			<VATPercent>6</VATPercent>
			<LineVAT>0</LineVAT>
			<WarehouseCode>01</WarehouseCode>
			<PmxDocumentLineList>
				<PmxDocumentLine>
					<Quantity>1</Quantity>
					<Uom>Pcs</Uom>
					<QualityStatusCode>RELEASED</QualityStatusCode>
					<SSCC>123456789012345678</SSCC>
					<StorageLocationCode>A01</StorageLocationCode>
					<BatchNumber>BATCH1</BatchNumber>
					<BatchNumber2/>
					<ExpiryDate>20160908</ExpiryDate>
				</PmxDocumentLine>
				<PmxDocumentLine>
					<Quantity>1</Quantity>
					<Uom>Pcs</Uom>
					<QualityStatusCode>RELEASED</QualityStatusCode>
					<SSCC>123456789012345680</SSCC>
					<StorageLocationCode>PIC01</StorageLocationCode>
					<BatchNumber>BATCH1</BatchNumber>
					<BatchNumber2/>
					<ExpiryDate>20160908</ExpiryDate>
				</PmxDocumentLine>
			</PmxDocumentLineList>
		</DocumentLine>
	</DocumentLineList>
</Document>

18.2.2. Example: exported CSV file structure of proof of delivery (exported route)

R,202,This is the route description,20160724
J,D,10,C00001,Customer name 1,Address line 1,Address line 2,,,,,
I,S,10,000000000000092241
I,S,10,000000000000092395
I,S,10,000000000000092289
J,D,20,C00002,Customer name 2,Address line 1,Address line 2,Address line 3,Address line 4,,,
I,S,20,000000000000093699
I,S,20,000000000000093651

18.3. Importing and exporting with the Interfacing tool

With the Interfacing tool certain documents can be imported to and exported from the system. This application is installed during the Produmex Tools installation (see 3.2. Install components).

18.3.1. Preparing documents for import

The following table shows the prefixes, the extensions and the object types to be used while preparing documents for import. The table lists documents with standard controllers.

Document Type Prefix Extension Object type
Purchase order OPOR_ xml 22
Purchase delivery OPDN_ xml 20
Purchase invoice OPCH_ xml 18
Purchase credit note ORPC_ xml 19
Purchase return ORPD_ xml 21
Sales order ORDR_ xml 17
Sales delivery ODLN_ xml 15
Sales invoice OINV_ xml 13
Sales credit note ORIN_ xml 14
Sales return ORDN_ xml 16
Proof of delivery EPOD_ csv POD_RTHE
Advance shipping notice* N/Acsv18 or 22
Move* PMX_MV_ csv N/A
Move order* PMX_MO_ csv N/A

*See section 18.3.3.Templates for importing.

18.3.2. Running the Interfacing tool

The tool is located in the installation folder of the Produmex Tools, for example: C:\Program Files\Produmex \Produmex Tools\ and the file name is Produmex.Sbo.Logex.Tools.InterfacingTool.exe.

Start the interfacing tool with startup parameters. The following command line parameters are supported:

  • /cs: Contains the connection string that should be used. Default value: 'SboConnectionString'
  • /t: Defines the type of the interface. Possible values:
    • salesorder
    • salesdelivery
    • salesinvoice
    • salescreditnote
    • salesreturn
    • purchaseorder
    • purchasedelivery
    • purchaseinvoice
    • purchasecreditnote
    • purchasereturn
    • productionissue
    • productionreceipt
    • advanceshippingnotice
    • itemmasterdata
    • incomingpayment
    • move
    • moveorder
    • stock
    • stockqschange
    • businesspartnermasterdata
    • warehouseautomation
    • POD
      Default value: ‘stock’
  • /d: Defines the direction of the interface. Possible values:
    • import
    • export
      Default value: ‘export’.
  • /rf: If added, the system reprocesses failed actions.

Example: Produmex.Sbo.Logex.Tools.InterfacingTool.exe /cs:SboConnectionString /t:move /d:import

Note: It is recommended to run the interfacing tool as a scheduled task.

18.3.3. Templates for importing

18.3.3.1. Move and move order template for importing

1. For moves/move orders create a csv. file with the following fields:

  • FromPmxWhsCode: the code of the source warehouse
  • ToPmxWhsCode: the code of the destination warehouse
  • ItemCode: the item code of the product
  • Quantity: quantity to move or to make a move order from
  • Serialnumber: If the item is managed by serial numbers, add the serial number here.
  • SrcQualityStatusCode: the quality status of the stock that should be moved
  • DestQualityStatusCode: the quality status that the stock should get after the move
  • Batchnumber: If the item is managed by batches, add the batch number here.
  • InternalBatchnumber: If the item has a second batch number, add it here.
  • BestBeforeDate: If the item has a best before date, add it here.
  • SrcStorLocCode: the code of the source storage location
  • DestStorLocCode: the code of the destination storage location
  • SrcLogUnitIdentKey: the source LUID
  • DestLogUnitIdentKey: the destination LUID

Note: The field names are case sensitive.

2. Save the file as a .csv file.

Naming convention: Use the PMX_MO_ prefix for move order templates and the PMX_MV_ prefix for move templates. The system checks the file name to determine whether a move order or a move should be created.

Example:

  • Move order: PMX_MO_07032012.csv
  • Move: PMX_MV_07032012.csv
18.3.3.2. ASN template for importing

With the Interfacing Tool goods that are received against purchase orders or purchase invoices can be imported from CSV files to SAP B1. As a result of the import, the system generates open ASN lines, which you can use to create goods receipt PO documents.

To implement the import process, proceed as follows.

1. Prepare the CSV file with the 14 columns listed in the table below and provide the necessary data.
Make sure that you list all the 14 columns, keep the column names and the order of the columns as indicated in the table.

  • Alternatively, the ASN template can be used, which is available in your installation folder (Templates > Import Templates folder).
Field name (case sensitive)Description/Activity
ObjType In case of a purchase order the value of the field should be 22 while in case of a purchase invoice it should be 18.
Note: If no value is added to the field, the system automatically considers the object type a purchase order.
DocNum Add the document number of the purchase order/purchase invoice.
LineNum and ItemCode It is not mandatory to provide a value for both fields. You can provide only the line number, which you can check in SAP B1. If you provide only the item code, the system uses this value to find the line number.
Note: If the purchase order contains two or more lines with the same item code, the system cannot find the correct line number. In this case you need to provide a value for the line number as well.
Quantity Add the inventory quantity of the item to be received. If you provide value to the SerialNumber column, the value of the Quantity should be 1.
SSCC Add the SSCC of the logistic unit if there is any.
MasterSSCC Add the SSCC number of the master logistic unit if there is any.
Batch If the item is managed by batches, add the batch number in this column.
Batch2 Add the second batch number of the product if there is any.
BBD Add the best before date of the product if there is any.
SerialNumber Add the serial number of the product if there is any.
UF1 User information - optional
UF2 User information - optional
UF3 User information - optional

Example of a CSV file:

ObjType;DocNum;LineNum;ItemCode;Quantity;SSCC;MasterSSCC;Batch;Batch2;BBD;SerialNumber;UF1;UF2;UF3;
22;123;0;ITEM01;10;123456789012345678;;BATCHA;;20200131;;User info 1;;;
22;123;1;SERIAL01;1;123456789012345678;;BATCHA;;20200131;SER01;User info 1;;;
22;123;1;SERIAL01;1;123456789012345678;;BATCHA;;20200131;SER02;User info 1;;;

2. Save your CSV file to the folder defined in the Interface Monitor Input Path.

3. Run the Interfacing Tool.

4. You can check the imported data in SAP B1 by navigating to Produmex > Purchasing > ASN. The system displays the Open ASN Lines screen (see 6.3.2. Open ASN lines).

5. Now you can create goods receipt PO documents from the open ASN Lines (see 28.6. ASN Reception).

18.4. Monitoring EDI messages

EDI messages can be monitored on the Interface Monitor screen. The function is available by navigating to Produmex > Interfacing > Interface Monitor.

Interface Monitor

The list of the interfacing messages can be monitored with the following filters:

  • Type of message: the document type
  • Status: the status of the entry
    • Possible values are: All, Error, New, Processed
  • Text filter: Only those lines get listed which contain the text added to the field.
  • From - To: The lines get listed based on the defined period.

Click on the Refresh button to apply the filters.

To see more information about a message, select its line.

Click on the Log button to see the log entry. If the status of an entry is Error, the error message can be seen here.

The Reprocess button is active if the status is Error.

The Show file button is active if the status is Error and the direction is Import.

To correct a failed import proceed as follows:

  1. select the entry line,
  2. click on the Show file button,
  3. correct the file and save it,
  4. click on the Reprocess button to process the file again.

Performing the Picking Process

Picklists can be created from Sales Orders, Sales Reserve Invoices, Inventory Transfer Requests (if the source warehouse is a Produmex warehouse) and Production Orders.

When picklists are generated on the office level, they are immediately available on the shop floor. The picking process can be performed on the Mobile Client (scanner mode) by starting the picking flows listed below. Consult with the description of the flows and click on the name of the given flow to see its documentation.

Note: The production picking functions are documented in the Production Guide.

Picking Flows

1. Picking Flow:

  • The picking process is based on a single picklist or waves containing picklists for different customers and you are suggested to pick the allocated stock.
  • When picking for a single customer / delivery address, you can create a packed logistic unit directly. When picking for a wave containing different customers, you must use a movable location and after finishing the picking, a packing process must be performed.

2. Multi-Picking Flow:

  • The picking process is based on a single picklist or a wave. The flow is designed to use waves containing picklists for different customers, but the picking process can be performed for a single picklist as well. You are suggested to pick the allocated stock.
  • The flow always requires the use of a movable location and each picklist must be picked to a specific movable location.
  • After finishing the picking, a packing process must be performed.

3. Zone Picking Flow:

  • The picking process is based on a single picklist or waves containing picklists for different customers.
  • After selecting a picklist on the scanner, a zone must be selected. The flow proceeds with the step of selecting the items to pick, but only those items are listed that can be found in the selected zone. You are suggested to pick the allocated stock.
  • When picking for a single customer / delivery address, you can create a packed logistic unit directly. When picking for a wave containing different customers, you must use a movable location and after finishing the picking, a packing process must be performed.

4. Ad Hoc Picking Flow:

  • The input of the picking can be a single picklist or a route.
  • There is no stock allocated for the picking process, that is, you can select the available free items.
  • The flow supports the use of movable locations.
  • When the Ad Hoc Picking flow is started, the following picking tasks can be selected:
    • Customer Collect: The input of the picking is a single customer collect picklist. When a customer is coming to the warehouse to make a request and the picking process is performed, the customer must confirm that all the needed items are picked and loaded into the customer’s vehicle.
    • Picklist: A picklist must be selected during the flow. There is no customer confirmation step.
    • Route: A route must be selected during the flow. There is no customer confirmation step.

5. Box Pick and Pack Flow:

  • With the flow it is possible to perform the picking process directly into boxes on a cart. The flow is based on a single picklist or a wave containing picklists for different customers.
  • If a full SSCC is picked, the system keeps the existing SSCC number. If not, the system generates an SSCC number when the first item is picked.
  • The process always requires the use of a movable location. When the picking process is completed for the wave, the Unload Movable Locations to Dock Flow can be started on the Mobile Client to unload the movable locations to the dock.

6. Prepare Carts Flow:

  • The flow prepares carton boxes for the Multi-Picking Flow. It can be used for orders where items can be picked into one or more carton boxes (or logistic carriers) in which the items will be shipped.
  • The flow is based on a wave with one or more picklists and (with custom development) it is possible to assign more than one carton box and more than one movable location to each picklist in the selected wave.
  • During the flow an SSCC number is added to each carton box. The SSCC number can be preprinted or can be created during the flow.
  • With the end of the flow the Multi-Picking Flow can be started to pick the necessary items into the carton boxes. With the SSCC numbers added to the boxes in the Prepare Carts Flow, it is defined which items should be picked into which carton box.
  • The carton boxes are the final destinations of the items and no packing process is needed. With the end of the Multi-Picking Flow, the stock can go through the necessary shipping flow.
    Note: If a packing step is needed to double-check the content of the box, the Consolidated Packing Flow can be used and it can only fully confirm the content or reject it.

7. Undo Picking Flow:

  • With the flow goods can be removed from a picked or packed logistic unit and can be moved back to the warehouse. With the end of the flow the corresponding picklist lines are closed and you cannot redo the picking unless you create a new picklist.

19.1. Picking

19.1.1. Select a wave

Select a wave from the list.
When there is no custom wave description added on the pick list controller, the following information is displayed for waves:

  • Wave number
  • Customer card code and name
  • Shipping address

If the wave contains pick lists for multiple customers, then the following information is displayed by default:

  • [number of the pick list proposal] pick list number

The sorting of the pick lists is based on the ‘Wave order by’ setting on the pick list controller.

Pick lists will be listed if the following verifies:

  • The status is ’Not Ready’, ’Ready’, ’Partially Ready’ or ’Partially Picked’
  • The pick list is not customer collect
  • The ‘Use for Production?’ option is not enabled for the pick list type
  • Stock locking for pick lists is not disabled on the General Settings tab of the OSE
  • The ‘Use for picking’ option is checked for the pick list type

In case you have defined the name of your customized view on the Picklist controller (see section Picking/Multi-picking), the pick lists will be filtered on the basis of your view settings and those waves will be listed which meet the criteria defined in your view settings.

After the wave has been selected, all pick lists in the wave with the status ‘Not Ready’ or ‘Partially Ready’ will be converted to ‘Ready’ status. If the Picking: Make pick list ready for selected line? (Y/N) option is enabled on the pick list controller, then the system does not change the pick list status until a pick list line is selected. For more information about pick list statuses and inventory locks please see: Stock allocation algorithm

When the ‘Auto select the wave?’ option is set to true on the pick list controller, the system will automatically select the wave and only that wave will be shown on the screen.
When a wave is stared, it will be locked for the user.

Select a Wave

19.1.2. Remarks

If Pick and Pack remarks were added to the pick lists belonging to the selected wave, the remarks will be shown after the wave selection. Press the Ok button to acknowledge the remark.

Remarks

19.1.3. Select item to pick

Select the item to pick. Items from the pick list with open quantity are listed on the screen.
The items to pick are sorted based on the ’Pick items order by’ setting on the pick list controller. Displayed information:

  • Source location
  • Quantity to pick
  • Item code - description - barcode
  • SSCC number
  • Batch number
  • Best Before Date

If the 'Allow to select the item to pick?' setting is not enabled on the pick list controller, the system will automatically start the picking with the first item on the list.

If the 'Picking: Make pick list ready for selected line? (Y/N)' option is enabled on the pick list controller, the status of the line is only set to ‘Ready’ and the system only allocates stock for the line after the item on the line is selected on the scanner. The status of the other pick list lines is not changed until the user selects the item on the pick list line.

Select item

19.1.4. Identify moveable location

To pick onto a moveable location, scan it or select it form a list after pressing the Select moveable location button. For more information please see: 4.2. With moveable location

To pick without a moveable location, press the No moveable location button. For more information please see: 4.3. Without moveable location

To pick onto an existing logistic unit, press the Enter SSCC button. For more information please see: 4.4. Picking onto an existing logistic unit

If the wave is for multiple customers, the user is forced to pick onto a moveable location. The No moveable location and the Enter SSCC button is not shown on the screen.

Moveable location

19.1.4.1. No moveable location defined for the warehouse

If there is no moveable location defined in the warehouse, the system displays this screen instead.

To scan an existing SSCC, press the Enter SSCC button.
To create a new SSCC, press the New SSCC button.

Select task

19.1.4.2. With moveable location

Scan the moveable location or select it from a list after pressing the Select moveable location button.
The moveable location will be automatically selected if the ‘Auto selection of moveable location during picking?’ option is set to true on the pick list controller.
Picking onto a moveable location allows the operator to pick multiple orders and pack them onto a logistic carrier at another location (packing station). After the picking has been completed, the status of the pick list will be converted to ’Picked’. The stock will be ready for shipping after it went through the packing process.

19.1.4.3. Without a moveable location

Press the No moveable location button to proceed without a moveable location.
When no moveable location is used during the picking, the status of the pick list will be converted to ‘Packed’ automatically after the picking was completed, except when the option ‘Always status picked?’ is set to true for the pick list type.

19.1.4.3.1. Select an existing logistic unit

When there is a picked logistic unit with an open pick list for the same customer and ship to address, the system will ask whether to continue the picking onto an existing logistic unit or start a new one.

By default only the open logistic units on the same loading dock and for the same customer are listed. When the ‘Allow multiple customers on SSCC?’ option is set to true on the pick list controller, logistic units for other customers are listed too.

Scan the SSCC of an existing logistic unit or press the New logistic unit button to pick onto a new logistic unit.

If the ‘Only pick on 1 SSCC?’ option is enabled on the pick list controller and there are already items picked for the given pick list, then the system automatically selects the last logistic unit started for the pick list and skips the screen.

19.1.4.3.2. Select a logistic carrier

When starting a new logistic unit for the picking, the system will ask whether to pick onto a logistic carrier or not.
Scan the logistic carrier or select it from the list. To proceed without a logistic carrier press the No logistic carrier button.

If there is no free stock of logistic carriers the system will automatically skip this screen.

19.1.4.4. Picking onto an existing logistic unit

When the ‘Allow to identify the SSCC to pick on?’ option is set to true on the pick list controller, an additional ‘Enter SSCC’ button is displayed on the screen. Press this button to identify the SSCC to pick on. On the next screen scan the SSCC.

Identify SSCC

19.1.5. Identify pick location/source SSCC

On the next screen identify the pick location or the source SSCC.

19.1.5.1. Identify pick location

Scan the location code or select the location from a list after pressing the Select location button. Only the proposed location can be selected.

Press the Other tasks’ button to select another moveable location, to select alternate stock, to skip the item or to start a new logistic unit.

When the ‘Skip screen to identify the pick location? (Y/N)’ option is set to true on the pick list controller, the system will automatically proceed with the allocated pick location and goes to the Scan a product screen. Please see: 6. Identify product

Identify pick location

19.1.5.2. Scan an SSCC

The system will ask the user to scan the SSCC in the following scenarios:

  1. The ‘Force the user to pick full pallet?’ option is set to true on the pick list controller and the stock that needs to be picked is on a full pallet.
  2. The ‘Item picking: Force user to scan SSCC when stock is on SSCC?’ option is set to true on the pick list controller.

On the lower part of the screen the details of the product to pick is displayed:

  • Location code
  • Quantity to pick (uom)
  • Item code, description and barcode
  • Batch number
  • Best Before Date
  • SSCC number/Total quantity to pick

Only the proposed SSCC can be scanned otherwise the system will show an error message.

Scan SSCC

19.1.5.3. Other tasks

Press the Other mov .loc. button to continue the picking onto another moveable location.

When there is insufficient stock from the proposed item, batch or best before date, press the Alternate stock button. The system will show the alternatives the operator can pick.

If the Force first available batch on selecting alternate item? (Y/N) is set to true on the Picklist controller(section All, except Ad hoc picking), you can select an item only from the batch with the earliest expiry date that meets the shelf-life requirements.

When the total number of the item cannot be picked, press the Skip item button.

Task

If not picking onto a moveable location, instead of the Other mov. loc. button a Logistic unit is full button is displayed. The button is only visible if there already are items picked on to the logistic unit.
Press this button to finish the logistic unit and continue the picking onto another.

Task

19.1.5.3.1. Logistic unit is full

After pressing the Logistic unit is full button, confirm that the logistic unit is full.

Press No to proceed the picking onto the same logistic unit.

Press Yes to continue the picking onto another logistic unit. The logistic label will be printed. See: 9. Labels printed.
Then select a new logistic unit to continue picking the remaining number of items.

Logistic unit full

19.1.5.3.1.1. Capture weight

If the ‘Ask weight?’ or ‘Ask weight Sub SSCC?’ option is set to true on the Produmex pick list types user table for the pick list, and there is a scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the weight of the logistic unit can be measured on the connected scale after the logistic unit is finished.

Make sure that conversions between the units of measurements are set up correctly on the Units of Measure - Setup (OUOM) and Weight - Setup (OWGT) SBO standard tables.

  1. The measured weight. The UoM is the UoM defined for the scale. The number of decimals displayed depends on the scale accuracy.
    This field is automatically filled with the weight measured on the connected scale. It is possible to manually overwrite the measured weight.
    If the weight is manually added or the connection to the scale is lost, the value starts flickering in red.
  2. If the scale has a defined zero command, the ‘Zero’ button is displayed.
  3. If the scale has a defined tare command, the ‘Tare’ button is displayed.
  4. The code of the connected scale.
  5. If there are more than one scales defined under the dock/packing line, an additional Switch scale button is displayed on the screen. Tap this button to change the scale.
    On the next screen select the scale from the list. Every scale defined under the dock/packing line is listed. After switching the scale, the screen will use the chosen scale. After proceeding with the flow, and a new weight needs to be captured, the standard logic to choose a scale is used. This means that switching scale only switches the scale for the current weighing.
  6. SSCC number of the logistic unit.
  7. Theoretical weight: The theoretical weight is the sum of the weight of the items on the logistic unit. The item weight can be defined on the Sales tab of the Item Master Data.
  8. In the case of master SSCC’s, an additional Sub SSCC’s weight value is shown. The value is calculated as the sum of the measured weight of the Sub SSCC’s.
19.1.5.3.1.2. Enter dimensions

If the Ask weight?/ Ask weight Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, and there is no scale defined under the shipping dock/packing line, the user has to enter the weight of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished. The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Weight UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

Based on the pick list type settings, the user might have to enter the dimension(s) of the (sub) logistic unit after it is finished.

When there are package dimensions defined on the Package Dimensions table, the user can select a predefined dimension instead of entering the length, the width and the height manually. The ’Select a package’ screen opens. On this screen every package dimension that is not cancelled is listed. Select a dimension from the list or tap the Enter dimensions manually button.

When the Enter dimensions manually button is tapped or there are no package dimensions defined, the user has to enter the dimensions manually.

  • If the Ask length?/ Ask length Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the length of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask width?/ Ask width Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the width of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.
  • If the Ask height?/ Ask height Sub SSCC? option is enabled for the pick list type, the user has to enter the height of the (sub) logistic unit after the it is finished.

The data will be stored on the PMX_LUID table. The unit of measure is the Default Length UoM set on the Display tab of General Settings.

19.1.5.3.2. Alternate stock

After pressing the Alternate stock button, the system will propose alternate items to pick. All stock that can be allocated for the pick list will be listed. Displayed information:

  • Pick location
  • Quantity to pick
  • Item code, description and barcode
  • Batch number
  • Best Before Date
  • SSCC information

Select an item to pick and continue with the process.

When the ‘Alternate: Show locked quantity for current line?’ option is enabled on the pick list controller, the item that was locked for the pick list is also displayed on the list of alternate items.

When the ‘Copy batch number when selecting alternate item?’ option is enabled on the pick list controller, the system will copy the original proposed batch number to the selected alternate stock.

If the 'Ad hoc alternate item?' option is set to true on the pick list controller, instead of proposing alternate stock, the system will return to the ‘Scan an SSCC’ screen.
The user have to go through all the steps of stock identification. The user can scan or select anything, but in the background the system will validate the entered values. The system will only proceed if the identified stock is existing and can be used for picking.

19.1.5.3.3. Skip item

After pressing the Skip item button, select a reason why the full quantity cannot be picked. Every reason that can be used for picking will be listed.

Skip item

19.1.6. Identify product

Scan the product or select a product from a list after pressing the Select a product button. Every item on the pick location is listed.
When the ‘Disable selection of items’ option is set to true on the pick list controller, the item cannot be selected.

Displayed information:

  • Pick location
  • Quantity to pick
  • Item code, description, barcode
  • Batch number
  • Best Before Date
  • Total quantity to pick (sum of the open quantities of every item on the sales order)
  • SSCC number

Identify product

19.1.6.1. Select a batch number

When there are more than one batch of the item on the pick location, it has to be verified that the right batch is picked. When the product has been identified by scanning, the system will check that whether the batch and best before date information are included in the barcode. If it is, the system will automatically proceed with that batch and best before date and skips this screen.

Select the batch from the list. The following information is displayed on the screen:

  • Batch number
  • Second batch number
  • Best Before Date
  • Quality status.

Only the allocated batch can be selected.

If the ‘Auto select batch/BBD on picking?‘ option is set to true on the pick list controller, the system will automatically select the batch and will skip the screen automatically.

Select batch

19.1.7. Add quantity

After the product to pick has been identified, add the quantity to pick. For more information about the quantity adding screens see: Screens for entering additional information.

The number of the picked items can be modified, however there is a maximum limit:

  • When the quantity to pick is greater than the available quantity on the pick location, the operator cannot pick more than the available quantity.
  • When the quantity to pick is less than the available quantity on the pick location, the maximum limit is the open quantity to pick, unless the ‘Allow over picking’ option is set to true on the General settings tab.

Add quantity

19.1.8. Items are picked

When the quantity to pick is defined, the picking of the item is concluded. The system displays the message:

Items picked

Tap on the OK button.

Note: With setting Time to show ‘item is picked’ message? on the pick list controller you can set the number of seconds during which time the Items are picked screen is shown or you can skip the screen.

Next step:

  • If there is no more item to pick, the system prints the logistic label (see section 9. Labels printed).

Note: If the full quantity of the selected item is picked and the 204 - Picking: after item is picked print event is set for the pick list type on the Print Events tab of the Organizational Structure, the system asks if you want to print a label. To proceed with the printing click OK.

Pick list status:

  • If there is no more item to pick and you have picked onto a moveable location or setting Always status picked? is set to true for the pick list type on the Produmex Pick List Type UDT, the status of the pick list is converted to Picked. Otherwise, the status of the pick list is converted to Packed.
  • If the status of the pick list is Packed and the Automatic shipping is set for the item on the sales order, the item is automatically shipped and the sales/inventory delivery is created.

19.1.9. Labels printed

After a pick list or a logistic unit is finished, the logistic label will be printed.
Displayed information:

  • Loading dock code
  • SSCC number
  • Customer code and name

Press Yes to reprint the label.
Press No to proceed with the picking.

Label printed

19.1.10. Count colli

When the ‘Count colli after picking’ checkbox is ticked on the ‘General’ tab of the Organizational Structure, a further check is applied in the end of the picking.

Enter the right number of the picked colli. The count is done in the inventory UoM.

Count colli

The number of the reties can be configured on the General settings too. If the operator enters the wrong number, the system issues a warning and displays the number of the remaining retries.

If the operator exceeds the number of retry attempts, the system closes the pick list and generates a new one for the sales order in question. (Because the pick list is closed, the locking will be removed from the stock.) The system also instructs the operator to move the picked items back.

Count colli

If there is ‘Location after incorrect count’ defined on the ‘General Settings’ tab of the Organizational Structure, the system will move the picked items to that location.
If there is no location after incorrect count defined, the picked stock will remain on the dock.

Count colli

19.2. Multi-Picking flow

19.2.1. Scan the picklist number

Scan the picklist number. A picklist can be scanned if the following verifies:

  • The status of the pick list is status ‘Not Ready’, ‘Partially Ready’, ‘Ready’ or ‘Partially Picked’
  • The ‘Use for Production?’ option is not enabled for the pick list type

After the user scanned the pick list, the system identifies the wave.

If the ‘Use for multi picking’ option is not set for the pick list type of the pick list, it cannot be picked in the multi picking flow. When picking a wave that contains such pick lists, the user has to scan these pick list among the other pick lists, but these pick list will not be taken into account when the system list the items to pick.

If the ’Multi picking: Allow to select wave?’ option is enabled on the Pick List Controller, the wave can be selected from a list.

Scan pick list

19.2.2. Identify moveable location

Identify the moveable location. Only moveable locations from the same warehouse as the pick list can be scanned. The scanned moveable location will be assigned to the pick list. One moveable location can only have one pick list assigned.

Displayed information:

  • Scanned pick list number
  • Moveable location code (if the pick list already has an assigned moveable location

If the ‘Multi picking: Set movable location at start of picking? (Y/N)’ option is set to true on the pick list controller, the system identifies the wave after the first pick list is scanned and automatically proceeds to the Select item to pick screen.
The moveable location will be assigned to the pick list after the first item from the pick list is picked.

Moveable location

19.2.2.1. Scan the next pick list (wave with multiple pick list)

Scan the next pick list number. A pick list can be scanned if it is in the same wave as the first scanned pick list.

Displayed information:

  • The sequence number/Number of pick list in the wave. Only pick list in the wave can be scanned.

Scan next

19.2.2.2. Scan the next pick list (new wave)

Scan the next pick list number or press the Done button to start picking the scanned pick lists.
A pick list can be scanned if it is linked to the same warehouse as the first scanned pick list.

Displayed information:

  • The sequence number of the pick list. There is no limit for the number of pick lists.

Scan next

19.2.3. Remarks

If Pick and Pack remarks were added to the pick lists, the remarks will be shown after pressing the Done button or scanning every pick list. Press the Ok button to acknowledge the remark.

Remarks

19.2.4. Select item to pick

After pressing the Done button, or after scanning every pick list in the wave, the list of the items to pick is displayed. Every item from the scanned pick lists that is not yet picked is listed.

Displayed information:

  • Proposed pick location
  • Quantity to pick
  • Item code – description – barcode
  • SSCC number
  • Batch number
  • Best Before Date

If the ’Allow to select the item to pick?’ setting is not enabled on the pick list controller, the system will automatically start the picking with the first item on the list.

Select item

19.2.5. Identify pick location

On the bottom of the screen the picking data is displayed:

  • Pick location
  • Quantity to pick
  • Item code - description - barcode
  • Batch number
  • Best Before Date
  • SSCC number
  • Total quantity to pick

Scan the pick location or select it from a list after pressing the Select location button.

To perform other tasks, press the Other tasks button.

When the ‘Skip screen to identify the pick location? (Y/N)’ option is set to true on the pick list controller, the system will automatically proceed with the allocated pick location and goes to the Scan a product screen. Please see: 7. Identify product

ick location

19.2.5.1. Other tasks

Press the Other tasks button to perform the following actions:

Other task

19.2.6. Identify a product

Scan the product or select a product from a list after pressing the Select a product button. Every item on the pick location is listed.
When the ‘Disable selection of items’ option is set to true on the pick list controller, the item cannot be selected.

Displayed information:

  • Pick location
  • Quantity to pick
  • Item code, description, barcode
  • Batch number
  • Best Before Date
  • Total quantity to pick (sum of the open quantities of every item on the sales order)
  • SSCC number

Identify product

19.1.6.1. Select a batch number

When there are more than one batch of the item on the pick location, it has to be verified that the right batch is picked. When the product has been identified by scanning, the system will check that whether the batch and best before date information are included in the barcode. If it is, the system will automatically proceed with that batch and best before date and skips this screen.

Select the batch from the list. The following information is displayed on the screen:

  • Batch number
  • Second batch number
  • Best Before Date
  • Quality status.

Only the allocated batch can be selected.

If the ‘Auto select batch/BBD on picking?‘ option is set to true on the pick list controller, the system will automatically select the batch and will skip the screen automatically.

Select batch

19.2.7. Add quantity

After the product to pick has been identified, add the quantity to pick. For more information about the quantity adding screens see: Screens for entering additional information.

The number of the picked items can be modified, however there is a maximum limit:

  • When the quantity to pick is greater than the available quantity on the pick location, the operator cannot pick more than the available quantity.
  • When the quantity to pick is less than the available quantity on the pick location, the maximum limit is the open quantity to pick, unless the ‘Allow over picking’ option is set to true on the General settings tab.

Add quantity

19.2.8. Identify movable location or destination SSCC

19.2.8.1 Identify movable location

Identify the movable location to pick onto. Only the movable location assigned to the picklist can be scanned or selected.

On the bottom of the screen the following information is displayed:

  • Code of the movable location
  • Quantity to pick
  • Item code – description – barcode
  • SSCC number
  • Total quantity to pick

Moveable location

19.2.8.2 Identify the destination SSCC

In case there is an SSCC assigned in the Prepare carts flow, at this point you can scan the destination SSCC so that you can make sure that the items are in the right box.

On the screen you can see the SSCC number to be scanned and the movable location is also displayed.

With this step the status of the items becomes packed. You can start a Consolidated packing flow to double check the content of the boxes or the stock can go a through a shipping process immediately.

It is possible, through custom development, that multiple boxes are prepared for one pick list. If there are multiple boxes and it is not exactly defined what needs to be stored in which box, you will see a list of SSCC’s on the screen and you need to scan one of them.

19.2.9. Items are picked

After every item was picked, the system goes back to the ‘Scan the pick list number’ screen.

Because in the multi-picking flow it is mandatory to pick onto a moveable location, the status of the pick list after the picking will always be ‘Picked’ and the stock has to go through packing before it can be shipped.

Item picked

19.3. Prepare Carts Flow

The Prepare Carts flow can be used for orders where items can be picked into one or more carton boxes in which the items will be shipped.
The flow is based on a wave and makes it possible to assign more than one carton box and more than one movable location to each pick list in the selected wave. Besides, during the flow an SSCC number is added to each carton box.
Prepare Carts configuration: Configuration Guide / 5.1.3.44. Picklist controller / Prepare carts

The flow prepares the carton boxes for the Multi-picking flow. With the end of the Prepare Carts flow the operator needs to start a multi-picking flow to pick the items into the carton boxes. Due to the SSCC numbers added to the boxes in the Prepare Carts flow, the operator will know which items should be picked into which carton box.

As the carton boxes are the final destinations of the items, no packing process is needed. When the operator finishes the multi-picking flow, the stock can go through the necessary shipping flow. If a packing step is needed to double check the content of the box, the setting Always pick to status picked on the pick list type needs to be enabled (SAP Tools > Default forms > Produmex pick list types (PMX_PLTY)). This will allow users to perform a packing step to double check the content in a Consolidated packing flow (keeping SSCC number). That packing step can only fully confirm the content or reject it.

Bild1553511141651

Picklist proposalPicklistSelect a waveSelect a picklistSelect a logistic carrierScan an SSCCSelect a movable locationSelect another logistic carrier and movable locationSelect another picklistWave has been preparedMulti-picking

To start the flow, press the Sales button on your fat client, then select Prepare Carts.

19.3.1. Select a wave

Select a wave from the list.

The order of the pick lists is based on the Wave-order by setting on the picklist controller.

When there is no custom wave description added on the pick list controller, the following information is displayed about the waves:

  • Wave number
  • Customer card code and name
  • Shipping address

If the wave contains pick lists for multiple customers, the fat client displays the numbers of the picklist proposals on the left-hand side and the wave number on the right-hand side.

Select a wave

19.3.2. Select a picklist

Select a picklist from the list.

The order of the picklists is based on the Pick list–Order by setting on the picklist controller.

The picklists belonging to the selected wave will be listed if they have not been prepared yet, or if there is no movable location assigned to them.

Select a picklist

19.3.3. Select a logistic carrier

Select a logistic carrier (carton box or pallet) by scanning the necessary barcode. (Barcodes are defined in the Item Master Data).

Alternatively, you can tap Select item and select the appropiate logistic carrier from the list.

Tap No logistic carrier if you do not use any logistic carrier or logistic carriers are not recorded in the system.

Select a logistic carrier

In case you scan the wrong barcode, you will see the following message:

Error message

19.3.4. Scan an SSCC

Scan the SSCC number of the logistic carrier if it already exists or tap New SSCC and the system will generate a new one.

In case you wish to use the New SSCC option, please make sure that in the Organizational structure settings:

  1. you add the DefaultPickingPrepareCartNewSSCCLabel report to your report list (see Configuration Guide / 5.1.5. Reports) and
  2. you set up the print event of Picking: Prepare cart: New SSCC created (see Configuration Guide / 5.1.6. Print events).

Error message

19.3.5. Select a movable location

Select a movable location.

Only those movable locations can be selected which are not assigned to picklists with status Not ready, Partially ready, Ready, Partially Picked.

On the screen you will see the SSCC number as well.

Select a movable location

In case you select the wrong movable location, you will see the following message:

Error message

19.3.6. Select another logistic carrier and movable location

It is possible, through custom development, that a pick list is defined to have multiple Picking logistic units. In this case you need to assign another logistic carrier and another movable location to this particular picklist, therefore you will be navigated back to step 3. Select a logistic carrier and you need go through steps 3-5 again (Select a logistic carrier, Scan an SSCC, Select a movable location).
Please note that in this case you will have to select a new movable location which is n